Transcript
EN
P-C2660 MFP / P-C2665 MFP User Manual
P-C2660 MFP / P-C2665 MFP Digital Multifunctional Colour System Copy / Print / Scan / Fax A4
Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this machine. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition. Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine. We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary. Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine, frequently-used operations, routine maintenance, and troubleshooting action. Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine. Safety Guide (for this machine only) Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
DVD (Product Library) Operation Guide (This Guide) Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting. Fax Operation Guide Embedded Web Server RX User Guide Printing System Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide
Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol. .... [General warning] .... [Warning of high temperature] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol. .... [Warning of prohibited action] .... [Disassembly prohibited] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol. .... [Alert of required action] .... [Remove the power plug from the outlet] ....
[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
i
Contents
Contents Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv 1
Part Names Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2
Preparation before Use Check bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Energy Saver Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Switching the Language for Display [Language] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Embedded Web Server RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
3
Basic Operation Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 One-Touch Keys and Program Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Confirm Destination Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Specifying Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Scanning using TWAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Checking Remaining Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
4
Copying Functions Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
ii
Contents Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 5
Sending Functions Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Sending Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Duplex Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Original Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Subject and Body Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Scanning Image using Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
6
Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Printing from a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Printing from a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
7
Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Device/Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
8
Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75 Document Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 Printing Reports/Sending Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117 Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123 Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141 Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-158 Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-173 Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-174 Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-185
iii
Contents Optional Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NW InterfaceSend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-196 8-208 8-209 8-214 8-215
9
Maintenance Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Toner Container Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Replacing the Waste Toner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
10
Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Responding to Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
11
Management User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35 Appendix Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-2 Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-9 Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-13 Color balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-23 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-24 Color saturation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-24 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-25 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-29 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
iv
Quick Guide
Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information before using this machine. Administrator tasks
To make copies It copies.
To print
Simply press the Start key to make copies. You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the paper size, adjusting the density, etc.
What you want to do
Copying with specific settings
It prints.
You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory.
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
Print via a network
Connecting Cables
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Install the printer driver on your computer *1 Setup Loading Paper...2-47
Placing Originals on the Platen...2-65
Operation
Copying Functions ...4-1
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory ... 6-2
*1: For more information, refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide.
v
Printing Printing from Applications ...3-21
Administrator tasks
To send documents It sends.
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in USB memory.
What you want to do
Send to Folder (SMB)
Send as E-mail
Saving Documents to USB Memory
Connecting Cables
Plug the USB memory
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Create a shared folder on the destination computer. ...3-31
Setup Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)...8-158
Place the originals on the platen
Operation
Sending ...3-24 *1 Sending Functions ...5-1
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ...6-5
*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address directly. vi
Administrator tasks
To send a FAX (Only on products with the fax function installed) As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network. It faxes.
NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
What you want to do
Send a FAX
FAX directly from a computer
Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine. Selection of Telephone Line (Inch version only) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer *1 Setup Selection of Transmit Terminal Identification (TTI)...2-3 *2 on the FAX Operation Guide Place the originals on the platen
Operation
FAX Operation (Basic) ...3-1 on the FAX Operation Guide
About Network FAX ...7-1 on the FAX Operation Guide
*1: For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide. *2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the address directly.
vii
Menu Map
Copy key
Send key
(Continued on next page)
Function Menu key
Function Menu key
(Continued on next page)
Paper Selection
(page 4-4)
Collate
(page 3-19)
Duplex
(page 3-15)
Zoom
(page 3-12)
Combine
(page 4-11)
Original Size
(page 4-2)
Orig.Orientation
(page 4-8)
Original Image
(page 3-10)
Density
(page 3-9)
EcoPrint
(page 4-10)
Continuous Scan
(page 4-14)
File Name Entry
(page 4-17)
JobFinish Notice
(page 4-15)
Print Override
(page 4-18)
Color Selection
(page 4-19)
Color Balance
(page 4-20)
Sharpness
(page 4-22)
Backgrnd Density
(page 4-23)
Saturation
(page 4-25)
Color Selection
(page 5-18)
Original Size
(page 5-2)
Original Image
(page 5-15)
Scan Resolution
(page 5-17)
Sending Size
(page 5-4)
Zoom
(page 5-6)
Orig.Orientation
(page 5-10)
Continuous Scan
(page 5-19)
File Format
(page 5-12)
File Name Entry
(page 5-20)
viii
Send key
Function Menu key
Subject Entry
(page 5-21)
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
JobFinish Notice
(page 5-27)
FAX Resolution
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
FAX Delayed TX
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
FAX Direct TX
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
FAX RX Polling
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Density
(page 5-16)
Duplex
(page 5-8)
FTP Encrypted TX
(page 5-29)
File Separation
(page 5-14)
Sharpness
(page 5-22)
Backgrnd Density
(page 5-23)
Document Box key
Custom Box
(page 6-8)
Sub Address Box
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Polling Box
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Job Box
(page 6-16)
USB Memory
(page 6-2)
ix
Document Box key
Function Menu key
USB printing
Collate
(page 3-19)
Paper Selection
(page 4-4)
Duplex
(page 3-15)
EcoPrint
(page 4-10)
File Name Entry
(page 4-17)
JobFinish Notice
(page 4-15)
Print Override
(page 4-18)
Color Selection
(page 4-19)
Encrypted PDF
Document Box key
Function Menu key
Other than USB printing
JPEG/TIFF Print
(page 6-3)
XPS FitTo Page
(page 6-4)
File Name Entry
(page 4-17)
JobFinish Notice
(page 4-15)
Print Override
(page 4-18)
Del. after Print Document Box key
Function Menu key
Scan to Polling Box
x
Original Size
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Original Image
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Scan Resolution
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Orig.Orientation
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Continuous Scan
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
File Name Entry
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
JobFinish Notice
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Density
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Duplex
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Document Box key
Function Menu key
Scan to USB Memory
Color Selection
(page 5-18)
Original Size
(page 5-2)
Original Image
(page 5-15)
Scan Resolution
(page 5-17)
Storing Size
Status/Job Cancel key
Zoom
(page 5-6)
Orig.Orientation
(page 5-10)
Continuous Scan
(page 5-19)
File Format
(page 5-12)
File Name Entry
(page 5-20)
JobFinish Notice
(page 5-27)
Density
(page 5-16)
Duplex
(page 5-8)
Sharpness
(page 5-22)
Backgrnd Density
(page 5-23)
Print Job Status
(page 7-2)
Send Job Status
(page 7-2)
Store Job Status
(page 7-2)
Scheduled Job
(page 7-8)
Print Job Log
(page 7-8)
Send Job Log
(page 7-8)
Store Job Log
(page 7-8)
FAX Job Log
(page 7-8)
Scanner
(page 7-20)
Printer
(page 7-20)
FAX
(page 7-21)
Toner Status
(page 3-47)
Paper Status
(page 3-47)
USB Memory
(page 7-21)
SSD
(page 7-21)
USB Keyboard
(page 7-22)
xi
System Menu/Counter key
Report
Report Print
Admin Rpt Set.
Result Rpt Set.
Menu Map
(page 8-117)
Status Page
(page 8-117)
Font List
(page 8-118)
Opt NW Status
(page 8-118)
Outgoing FAX Rpt
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Incoming FAX Rpt
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Send Result
E-mail/Folder
(page 8-121)
FAX
(page 8-121)
CancelBefore Send
(page 8-121)
Dest. Info.
(page 8-121)
FAX RX Result
JobFinish Notice
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Do Not Attach Attach SendImage
Job Log History
Auto Sending
(page 7-13)
Send History
(page 7-13)
Destination
(page 7-13)
Subject
(page 7-13)
SSFC Log Subject Personal Info. Counter
(Continued on next page)
Printed Pages
by Function by Paper Size
Scanned Pages
xii
(page 11-35) Full Color
(page 11-35)
Black & White
(page 11-35) (page 11-35)
System Menu/Counter key
System/ Network
Network Setting
TCP/IP Settings
(Continued from previous page)
TCP/IP
(page 8-174)
IPv4 Setting
(page 8-175)
IPv6 Setting
(page 8-175)
Bonjour
(page 8-177)
Protocol Detail
(page 8-181)
WSD-SCAN
(page 8-178)
WSD-PRINT
(page 8-179)
IPSec
(page 8-194)
Secure Protocol
SSL
(page 8-185)
IPP Security
(page 8-186)
HTTP Security
(page 8-187)
LDAP Security
(page 8-189)
SMTP Security
(page 8-190)
POP3 Security 1
(page 8-192)
POP3 Security 2
(page 8-192)
POP3 Security 3
(page 8-192)
Host Name LAN Interface Restart Network (Continued on next page)
(Continued on next page)
Optional Network
(page 8-184) Basic
NW InterfaceSend
xiii
(page 8-174)
(page 8-196) (page 8-208)
System Menu/Counter key
System/ Network
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
User/Job Account
I/F Block Set.
USB Host
(page 8-209)
USB Device
(page 8-210)
USB Storage
(page 8-211)
Option I/F 1 (P-C2660 MFP only)
(page 8-213)
Option I/F 2 (P-C2660 MFP only)
(page 8-213)
Option I/F (P-C2665 MFP only)
(page 8-213)
Security Level
(page 8-214)
Restart
(page 8-173)
Op Functions
(page 8-215)
User Login Set.
User Login
(page 11-3)
Local User List
(page 11-3)
IC Card Settings
Job Account.Set.
(Continued on next page)
(Continued on next page)
Password Login
Group Auth.
(page 11-10)
NW User Property
(page 11-11)
Job Accounting
(page 11-13)
AccountingAccess
(page 11-16)
Account. Report
(page 11-33)
Total Accounting
(Continued on next page)
Key Login
Printed Pages
(page 11-29)
Scanned Pages
(page 11-29)
FAX TX Pages
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
FAX TX Time
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Counter Reset
(page 11-29)
Each Job Account
xiv
(page 11-30)
System Menu/Counter key
User/Job Account
Job Account.Set.
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
Common Settings
Account. List Default Setting
(page 11-18) Apply Limit
(page 11-25)
Copy/Print Count
(page 11-21)
Counter Limit
(page 11-27)
Unknown ID Job
(page 11-12)
Language
(page 8-3)
Default Screen
(page 8-5)
Sound
Buzzer
Key Confirmation
(page 8-6)
Job Finish
(page 8-6)
Ready
(page 8-6)
Warning
(page 8-6)
Keyboard Confirm
(page 8-6)
FAX Speaker
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
FAX Monitor
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Display Bright. Orig./Paper Set.
(page 8-7) Custom Orig.Size
(page 8-8)
Def. Orig. Size
(page 8-10)
Custom PaperSize
(page 8-11)
Custom PaperSize
Cassette 1 Size
(page 8-13)
Cassette 1 Type
(page 8-13)
Cassette 2 Size
(page 8-13)
Cassette 2 Type
(page 8-13)
Cassette 3 Size
(page 8-13)
Cassette 3 Type
(page 8-13)
Cassette 2 Set.
(Continued on next page)
(Continued on next page)
(Continued on next page)
xv
Cassette 3 Set.
System Menu/Counter key
Common Settings
Orig./Paper Set.
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
MP Tray Set.
(page 8-16)
MP Tray Type
(page 8-16)
Media Type Set. Media for Auto
(page 8-18) Full Color
(page 8-23)
Black & White
(page 8-23)
Def. PaperSource
(page 8-22)
SpcialPaper Act.
(page 8-24)
Preset Limit
(page 8-26)
Measurement
(page 8-27)
Error Handling
DuplexPaperError
(page 8-28)
PaperMismatchErr
(page 8-28)
Date Setting
Date/Time
(page 8-141)
Date Format
(page 8-143)
Time Zone
(page 8-144)
Summer Time
(page 8-145)
Auto Panel Reset
(page 8-146)
PanelReset Timer
(page 8-147)
Low Power Timer
(page 8-149)
Timer Setting
Sleep Level (models except for Europe)
(Continued on next page)
MP Tray Size
(Continued on next page)
xvi
Quick Recovery
(page 8-150)
Energy Saver
(page 8-150)
Sleep Timer
(page 8-152)
Auto Err. Clear
(page 8-153)
Err. Clear Timer
(page 8-155)
Unusable Time
(page 8-156)
System Menu/Counter key
Common Settings
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
Function Default
Color Selection
(page 8-38)
Scan Resolution
(page 8-37)
FAX Resolution
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Original Image (Copy)
(page 8-34)
Original Image (Send)
(page 8-36)
Zoom
(page 8-41)
Collate
(page 8-45)
Orig.Orientation
(page 8-30)
Backgrnd (Copy)
(page 8-31)
Backgrnd (Send)
(page 8-32)
EcoPrint
(page 8-46)
File Name Entry
(page 8-42)
Subject/Body
(page 8-43)
Con.scan-ExptFAX
(page 8-33)
Con.scan-FAX
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
File Format
(page 8-40)
File Separation
(page 8-49)
JPEG/TIFF Print
(page 8-47)
XPS FitTo Page
(page 8-48)
Detail Setting
(Continued on next page)
(Continued on next page)
xvii
2 in 1 Layout
(page 8-50)
4 in 1 Layout
(page 8-51)
Border Line
(page 8-53)
Orig. Binding
(page 8-54)
Finish. Binding
(page 8-56)
Image Quality
(page 8-57)
Color TIFF Comp.
(page 8-58)
PDF/A
(page 8-59)
High Comp.PDF
(page 8-61)
System Menu/Counter key
Common Settings
(Continued from previous page)
(Continued from previous page)
Login Operation
(page 8-62)
RAM Disk Setting
(page 8-63)
Format SSD
(page 8-64)
Format SD Card
(page 8-65)
Optional Memory
Normal
(page 8-66)
Printer Priority
(page 8-66)
Copy Priority
(page 8-66)
JobsDetailStatus
(page 7-2)
Jobs Log
(page 7-8)
FAX Log
(page 7-8)
Disp. Status/ Log
Copy
Printer
(Continued on next page)
(Continued on next page)
TonerAlert Level
(page 8-68)
Paper Selection
(page 8-69)
AutoPaperSelect.
(page 8-70)
Auto % Priority
(page 8-71)
DP Read Action
(page 8-72)
Select Key Set.
Left
(page 8-73)
Right
(page 8-73)
Emulation Set.
PCL6
(page 8-99)
KPDL
(page 8-101)
KPDL(Auto)
(page 8-101)
Color Setting
(page 8-102)
EcoPrint
(page 8-102)
Override A4/LTR
(page 8-103)
Duplex
(page 8-104)
Copies
(page 8-105)
Orientation
(page 8-107)
Gloss Mode
(page 8-108)
Wide A4
(page 8-109)
FormFeed TimeOut
(page 8-109)
LF Action
(page 8-110)
CR Action
(page 8-111)
Job Name
(page 8-112)
xviii
System Menu/Counter key (Continued from previous page)
Printer
User Name
(page 8-113)
(Continued from previous page)
Paper Feed Mode
(page 8-114)
Auto Cass.Change
(page 8-115)
Send
Select Key Set.
Left
(page 8-75)
Right
(page 8-75)
Destination Check
Check beforeSend
(page 8-77)
Check New Dest.
(page 8-77)
Default Screen Send and Forward
(page 8-78) Forward
(page 8-79)
Destination
(page 8-80)
FAX
Document Box
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Custom Box
Detail/Edit
(page 8-94)
File Del. Time
(page 8-96)
Sub Address Box
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Job Box
(page 8-97)
Select Key Set.
Print
Store
(Continued on next page)
Edit Destination
Left
(page 8-83)
Right
(page 8-83)
Left
(page 8-83)
Right
(page 8-83)
Polling Box
(FAX OPERATION GUIDE)
Address Book
(page 8-168)
Print List
(page 8-168)
xix
System Menu/Counter key (Continued from previous page)
Adjust/Maint.
Copy Denst. Adj.
(page 8-123)
Send/Box Density
(page 8-124)
Backgrnd Density
Copy (Auto)
(page 8-125)
Send/Box (Auto)
(page 8-125)
AutoColorCorrect
(page 8-126)
ColorCalibration
(page 8-126)
Color Regist.
Normal
Detail
Print Chart
(page 8-128)
Adjust Magenta
(page 8-128)
Adjust Cyan
(page 8-128)
Adjust Yellow
(page 8-128)
Print Chart
(page 8-130)
Adjust Magenta
(page 8-130)
Adjust Cyan
(page 8-130)
Adjust Yellow
(page 8-130)
Correct. Bk Line Service Setting
(page 8-134) Service Status Network Status Test Page DeveloperSetting DeveloperRefresh LaserScanner Cln
(page 8-135)
Drum Refresh
(page 8-136)
Altitude Adj.
(page 8-137)
MC
(page 8-138)
FAX Country Code FAX Call Set. Remote Diag.Set. Remote Diag. ID Mem.Diagnostics
xx
(page 8-139)
Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows: •
Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
•
Humidity: 15 to 80 %
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. •
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
•
Avoid locations with vibrations.
•
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
•
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
•
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
xxi
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children. If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin. •
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness, contact a physician.
•
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.
xxii
Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it. If using the products with the fax function installed the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Energy Saver key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.
xxiii
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning •
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
•
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned. Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate
•
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
xxiv
Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics. • • • • • • • •
Legal Information......................................................... xxvi Regarding Trade Names ............................................ xxvii Energy Saving Control Function.................................. xxxi Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ............................... xxxi Paper Recycling .......................................................... xxxi Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .................... xxxi About this Operation Guide ........................................ xxxii Conventions in This Guide ........................................ xxxiii
xxv
Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Copyright owner is prohibited.
xxvi
Regarding Trade Names •
KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
•
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
•
PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
•
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
•
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
•
IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
•
AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
•
TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
•
All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc.
•
Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.
•
UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
•
This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
•
ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
xxvii
GPL/LGPL This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ lgpl.html) software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL/LGPL.
OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/ /www.openssl.org/)”
4
The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
[email protected].
5
Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
xxviii
Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (
[email protected]) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (
[email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (
[email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (
[email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (
[email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
xxix
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1
Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software.
2
You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3
To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4
You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5
This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6
You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7
Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9
Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
xxx
Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time.
Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer to Low Power Mode on page 2-9.
Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used. Automatic authentication does not take place in sleep mode or energy saver mode. To continue the installation, press the Energy Saver key to wake the machine from sleep mode or energy saver mode. For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-9
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3-15.
Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the ENERGY STAR.
xxxi
About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters. Chapter 1 - Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use. Chapter 3 - Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning. Chapter 4 - Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying. Chapter 5 - Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals. Chapter 6 - Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes. Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel a transmission Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu) Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation. Chapter 9 - Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner or waste toner box replacement. Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems. Chapter 11 - Management Explains user login administration and job accounting. Appendix Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications. Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine. Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
xxxii
Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. Convention
Description
Example
Bold
Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen.
Press the Start key.
[Regular]
Indicates a selection item on the Message Display.
Select [System].
Italic
Indicates a message displayed on the Message Display.
Ready to copy is displayed.
Used to emphasize a key word, phrase or references to additional information.
For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Note
Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference.
NOTE:
Important
Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems.
IMPORTANT:
Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it.
CAUTION:
Caution
Underline
A link function allows you to jump to a related page. Position the pointer over the underlined text until the pointer changes to a hand with appointing finger ( ). Then click the text. (In the Contents, Index and Menu Map, the linked areas are not underlined.)
xxxiii
Refer to Contents.
xxxiv
1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys. • •
Operation Panel............................................................ 1-2 Machine ........................................................................ 1-4
1-1
Part Names
Operation Panel Displays the System Menu/Counter menu screen, where you can check the system settings and counters. Displays the Document Box screen, where you can operate the document box and USB memory. Displays the Status screen, where you can check the status, print a status report, and pause or cancel the job in process.
Displays the Address Book screen, where you can add, edit and delete destinations. Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX number.* Displays the Add Destination screen, where you can add destinations. Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually sending a FAX.*
Displays the Copy screen, where you can make settings required for copying.
Message Display. Check what is shown here while operating the machine. Selects the menu displayed at the lower right in the Message Display.
Displays the FAX screen, where you can send a FAX.*
Used to register, call and delete destinations to the one-touch key numbers (1 to 22).
Selects the menu displayed at the lower left in the Message Display.
Displays the Send screen, where you can send an e-mail, folder (SMB/FTP) or FAX*.
Shifts to switch the one-touch key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to 22). Indicator is lit while shifted (12 to 22).
Blinks while print data is being received or data is transmitted.
Selects auto color mode. Selects full color mode. Selects black and white mode.
*
Only on products with the fax function installed.
1-2
Blinks while the machine is accessing the memory.
Part Names
1
Clears entered numbers and characters. Resets settings and displays the basic screen. Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when entering characters, change a value, etc. Puts the machine to sleep or wakes it up. Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered value. Lit when the machine's main power is on.
Displays the function menu for copy, print, transmission and document box.
Ends operation (logs out) on the Administration screen.
Numeric keys. Enter numbers and symbols.
Used to register or recall programs.
Returns the Message Display to the previous screen.
Cancels the printing job in progress.
Lights or blinks when an error occurs.
Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
1-3
Part Names
Machine 1
Document Processor
2
Operation Panel
3
Top Tray
4
Paper Stopper
5
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
6
Paper Width Guides
7
Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray
8
USB Memory Slot
9
Paper Cassette
10 Paper Gauge
1 2 3 4 5 8
9
6
10
7
11 Main Power Switch
11
12 Lower Feed Cover
12
13 Black Toner Container (K) 14 Magenta Toner Container (M) 15 Cyan Toner Container (C)
17
13 14 15 16
16 Yellow Toner Container (Y) 17 Top Cover 18 Waste Toner Cover 19 Waste Toner Box 18 19
1-4
Part Names
20 21 22 23
1
Fuser Cover Paper Transfer Unit Paper Ramp
20
Duplex Unit
21 22
32
24 25 26 27
33
28 29
30 31
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23
LINE connector* TEL connector* USB Interface Connector USB Memory Slot Network Interface Connector / Indicators Option Interface Slot 2 Right Cover Power Cord Connector Rear Cover Rear Cover Lever * Only on products with the fax function installed (Option Interface Slot 1)
1-5
Part Names
34 35
37
36
38 39 40
42 43
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
41
Original Width Guides Document Processor Cover Document Processor Open/Close Handle* Original Table Original Stopper Original Eject Table Top Cover Lever* Handles for moving Platen *
Slit Glass To prevent toppling, the top tray and document processor cannot be opened at the same time.
44 45 46 48 47
44 45 46 47 48
Cassette 1 Paper Width Guides Paper Width Adjusting Tab Paper Length Guide Paper Size Dial
1-6
2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals. • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check bundled items .................................................... 2-2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ...... 2-3 Connecting Cables ....................................................... 2-5 Power On/Off................................................................ 2-7 Energy Saver Function ................................................. 2-9 Switching the Language for Display [Language] ........ 2-11 Setting Date and Time ................................................ 2-12 Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) .................... 2-15 Installing Software ...................................................... 2-23 Embedded Web Server RX ........................................ 2-36 Loading Paper ............................................................ 2-47 Loading Originals........................................................ 2-65
2-1
Preparation before Use
Check bundled items Check that the following items have been bundled. •
Quick Installation Guide
•
Safety Guide
•
Safety Guide (for this machine only)
•
DVD (Product Library)
Documents Contained in the Included DVD The following documents are contained in the included DVD (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary. Documents Operation Guide (This Guide) Fax Operation Guide Embedded Web Server RX User Guide Printing System Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide
2-2
Preparation before Use
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.
2
Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below. Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) Embedded Web Server RX Administrator’s PC
Network
Network settings, Scanner default settings, User and destination registration
Send E-mail Sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E-mail message.
MFP
Printing
Network USB
Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC.
Network
Network
Network FAX
Send SMB
Network
Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP.
FAX
*
Network
FAX
TWAIN Scanning
USB
Only on products with the fax function installed
2-3
Network
WIA Scanning
USB
TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices.
Preparation before Use
Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use. Available Standard Interfaces Function
Interface
Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner /TWAIN Scanning/ WIA Scanning/ Network FAX*
Network interface
LAN (10Base-T, 100Base-TX or 1000Base-T Shielded)
Printer/ TWAIN Scanning/ WIA Scanning
USB interface
USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
*
Network FAX and FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed. For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
2-4
Preparation before Use
Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine.
1
If the machine power is on, press the Energy Saver key on the operation panel and make sure that the message displayed and memory light are off. Then, press the main power switch to turn off the power.
2
Connect the machine to the PC or your network device. When using the network interface, remove the cap.
3
Remove the Power Cord Connector Cover.
Off
On
1
2
2-5
2
Preparation before Use
4
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
5
Replace the Power Cord Connector Cover.
6
Turn the main power switch on. The machine begins to warm up.
7
When connecting the network cable, configure the network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-15.
Off
On
2-6
Preparation before Use
Power On/Off Power On
2
When the main power indicator is lit... Press the Energy Saver key.
When the main power indicator is off... Turn the main power switch on.
Off
On
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
Power Off Before turning off the main power switch, press the Energy Saver key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the memory indicator is off before turning off the main power switch.
Make sure that the indicator is off.
On
Off
2-7
Preparation before Use In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
IMPORTANT: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-8
Preparation before Use
Energy Saver Function If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine automatically enters sleep mode, which minimizes power consumption.
Low Power Mode The message display backlight turn off to reduce the power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode. If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode on products with the FAX function installed, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. To use the machine, press any key on the operation panel. The machine will be ready to use within 11 seconds. Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly. For information on the Low Power Mode settings, refer to Low Power Timer on page 8-149.
NOTE: When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep Timer is same, Sleep Mode overrides Low Power Mode.
Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep To enter Sleep, press the Energy Saver key. Message Display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep. If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the Message Display remains unlit. If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit. There are two sleep modes (models except for Europe): Quick Recovery and Energy Saver. The default setting is Energy Saver mode.
NOTE: When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep Timer is same, Sleep Mode overrides Low Power Mode.
2-9
2
Preparation before Use Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode if left idle for 1 minute. Quick Recovery Mode (models except for Europe) The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode. The machine recovers quickly when any key on the operation panel is pressed. The machine also automatically recovers and prints when a job is detected. If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the message display remains unlit. To use the machine, press any key on the operation panel. For more information about configuring settings, refer to Sleep Level (models except for Europe) on page 8150. Energy Saver Mode (models except for Europe) This mode reduces power consumption even more than quick recovery mode, and allows Sleep mode to be set separately for each function. To use the machine, press any key on the operation panel. The machine will be ready to use within 17 seconds. Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly. For more information on Energy Saver settings, refer to Sleep Level (models except for Europe) on page 8-150
2-10
Preparation before Use
Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the Message Display.
2
Use the procedure below to select the language.
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Language: a b 1 *English ********************* 2 Deutsch 3 Français
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
NOTE: The default settings of the Login User Name and Login Password are both "2600". If user management is selected in [Network Setting], press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to authenticate. Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Language].
5
Press the OK key. Language appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired language and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
2-11
Preparation before Use
Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
1
Turn on the main power switch.
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
Off
On
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
4
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Date Setting].
2-12
Preparation before Use
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
6
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
7
Press [Login] (the Right Select key). The Date Setting menu appears.
]
Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ]
Time Zone:
a b 1 -12:00 Internati ********************* 2 -11:00 UTC-11 3 -10:00 Hawaii
8
Press the or key to select [Time Zone].
9
Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.
10 Press the or key to select your region and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu.
Date Setting: a b 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone 4 Summer Time ********************* [ Exit ]
Summer Time: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
11 Press the or key to select [Summer Time].
12 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.
13 Press the or key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu.
2-13
2
Preparation before Use
Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ]
Date/Time: a b Year Month Day 01 01 2010 (Time Zone:Tokyo )
14 Press the or key to select [Date/Time].
15 Press the OK key. Date/Time appears.
16 Press the or key to move the cursor position, press the or key to enter year, month and day, and then press the OK key.
Date/Time: a b Hour Min. Second 45: 50 11: (Time Zone:Tokyo )
Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time 2 Date Format ********************* 3 Time Zone [ Exit ]
Date Format: a b 1 *Month/Day/Year ********************* 2 Day/Month/Year 3 Year/Month/Day
17 Press the or key to move the cursor position, press the or key to enter hours, minutes and seconds, and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu.
18 Press the or key to select [Date Format].
19 Press the OK key. Date Format appears.
20 Press the or key to select the desired display format and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu.
2-14
Preparation before Use
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, and other platforms. This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to Network Setup on page 8-174.
NOTE: After all network related settings have been done, turn the machine OFF and ON again. This is mandatory to make the settings effective! •
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned) ...2-17
•
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) ...2-17
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned) If an IP address will be automatically assigned, configure the settings below.
NOTE: The [DHCP] and [Auto-IP] settings are enabled by default. Specify the settings below when Network Setup on page 8-174 have been changed from their default state. Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Administrator only.
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and then press the OK key.
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have logged in using a Login User Name with administrator privileges. The default settings of the Login User Name and Login Password are both "2600". If you have logged in using a Login User Name without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. and return to the login screen.
2-15
2
Preparation before Use
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ]
TCP/IP: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
3
In the System/Network menu, press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP].
8
Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP 2 IPv4 Setting ********************* 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ]
10 Press the or key to select [IPv4 Setting].
2-16
Preparation before Use
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.
2 12 Press the or key to select [DHCP].
DHCP: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
14 Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
Auto-IP: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
15 Press the or key to select [Auto-IP].
16 Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.
17 Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Auto-IP: On".
NOTE: Before setting an IP address, ask your network administrator if your network environment requires input of an IP address. If input is necessary, ask your network administrator to obtain an IP address for you.
2-17
Preparation before Use Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Administrator only.
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and then press the OK key.
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have logged in using a Login User Name with administrator privileges. The default settings of the Login User Name and Login Password are both "2600". If you have logged in using a Login User Name without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
3
In the System menu, press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
2-18
Preparation before Use
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ]
TCP/IP: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
6
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears.
2 7
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP].
8
Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP 2 IPv4 Setting ********************* 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ]
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
10 Press the or key to select [IPv4 Setting].
11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.
12 Press the or key to select [DHCP]. DHCP: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
2-19
Preparation before Use
14 Press the or key to select [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
Auto-IP: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
15 Press the or key to select [Auto-IP].
16 Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.
17 Press the or key to select [Off] and then press the OK key.
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
IP Address:
a b
18 Press the or key to select [IP Address].
19 Press the OK key. IP Address appears.
123.145.167.189
20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address. Press the or key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the or key or the numeric keys to enter the IP Address. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255.
2-20
Preparation before Use
b
IP Address: 123.145.167.189
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) is [On], the current IP address is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an IP address, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) to Off.
21 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
Subnet Mask:
a b
22 Press the or key to select [Subnet Mask].
23 Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears.
123.145.167.189
24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Press the or key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the or key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255. IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) is [On], the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an Subnet Mask, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) to Off.
25 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Auto-IP 3 IP Address [ Exit ]
26 Press the or key to select [Default Gateway].
2-21
2
Preparation before Use
Default Gateway:
a b
27 Press the OK key. Default Gateway appears.
123.145.167.189
28 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway. Press the or key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the or key or the numeric keys to enter the Default Gateway. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255. IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) is [On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) to Off.
29 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
2-22
Preparation before Use
Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Software on DVD (Windows) You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express Install] is the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [Express Install], use [Custom Install]. For details, refer to Custom Install on page 2-26.
Software
Description
Installation method ●:Standard installation ○:Allows selection of the components to be installed Express Install
Custom Install
Printing System Driver
This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine. Use this driver to print PDF files.
●
○
Printing System (XPS) Driver
This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
-
○
KPDL mini-driver/ PCL mini-driver
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used with this driver.
-
○
TWAIN Driver
This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAINcompliant software application.
●
○
WIA Driver
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a TWAINcompliant software application is not installed in the computer.
-
○
FAX Driver
This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software application as a fax via the machine.
-
○
2-23
2
Preparation before Use
Software
Installation method ●:Standard installation ○:Allows selection of the components to be installed
Description
Express Install
Custom Install
Status Monitor
The Status Monitor shows a print system status message at the bottom right of the printing screen. You can also start Embedded Web Server RX to check and change printer settings.
●
○
Network Tool for Direct Printing
This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/Reader.
-
○
NETWORK PRINT MONITOR
This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network.
-
○
FONTS
These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in a software application.
●
○
NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. When connected by USB cable, Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep mode. To continue the installation, press the any key on the operation panel to wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before continuing. FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed. WIA driver and Printing System (XPS) Driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows Express Install The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Express Install]. For details, refer to Custom Install in the Custom Install on page 2-26.
1
Insert the DVD.
NOTE: •
Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
•
If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
•
If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
•
If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2-24
Preparation before Use
2
Display the screen.
2
Click [View License Agreement] and read the License Agreement.
3
Click [Express Install].
NOTE: To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
4
You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the standard TCP/ IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
NOTE: The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click (Reload).
5
Select the package. The following software will be installed.
2-25
•
Driver Package Printing System Driver, Status Monitor, Fonts
•
Scan Package TWAIN Driver
Preparation before Use
6
Click Install.
NOTE: If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
7
Finish the installation. When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine. Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
NOTE: When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed. For details, refer to the Device Settings in the Printing System Driver User Guide on the DVD. If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the printer driver installation procedure. The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network. If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver on 2-33. Custom Install The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Custom Install].
1
Insert the DVD.
NOTE: •
Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
•
If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
•
If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
•
If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2-26
Preparation before Use
2
Display the screen.
2
Click [View License Agreement] and read the License Agreement.
3
Click [Custom Install].
4
Select the device to be installed. The following buttons can be used. :
This changes the display to icon and text display. : Use this to select multiple items.
:
If the desired device does not appear, press this button to directly select the device.
5
Select the driver to be installed.
6
Select the utility to be installed.
2-27
Preparation before Use
7
Click [Install].
NOTE: •
If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
•
To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
8
Finish the installation. When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine. Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
NOTE: When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed. For details, refer to the Device Settings in the Printing System Driver User Guide on the DVD. If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the printer driver installation procedure. The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network. If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver on page 2-33.
2-28
Preparation before Use
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.
2
NOTE: •
Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
•
When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)]. For details, refer to Emuration Set on page 8-99.
•
If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to Bonjour Settings on page 8-177.
•
In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
1
Insert the DVD. This section explains how to install the printer driver in Mac OS.
2
Double-click OS X 10.5 or higher.
3
Double-click (brand name) OS X 10.5.
2-29
Preparation before Use
4
The printer driver installation program starts up.
5
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software. This completes the printer driver installation. If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected. If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
6
Click Print & Fax.
7
Click the plus symbol (+) to add the installed printer driver.
2-30
Preparation before Use
8
Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in "Name". Change if needed.
NOTE: When using a Bonjour connection, select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Printer Name". The driver with the same name as the machine automatically appears in "Driver".
9
Select the options available for the printer and click Continue.
10 The selected printer is added.
2-31
2
Preparation before Use
Uninstalling the Software Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
NOTE: Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
1
Click Start button on the Windows and then select All Programs, (name of offer company), and Uninstall Product Library to display the Uninstall Wizard.
2
Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted. Click Uninstall. If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE: The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library. In the Product Library installation screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
2-32
Preparation before Use
Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver.
1
Select Start button on the Windows, All Programs, (Brand Name) and then TWAIN Driver Setting. TWAIN Driver screen appears. In Windows 8, select Search in charms, Apps, and then TWAIN Driver Setting.
2
Click Add.
3
Enter the machine name in the Name field.
4
Click next to the Model field and select this machine from the list.
5
Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the Scanner Address.
NOTE: When the machine's IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.
6
Click User Authentication Settings. If user login administration is invalid, go to Step 8.
2-33
2
Preparation before Use
7
Select the checkbox beside Authentication, enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters) and then click OK.
8
Click OK.
9
The machine is registered to the PC and the machine name and model name are displayed in the Scanner List field.
NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine. Click Edit to change names and other settings.
Setting the WIA Driver (Windows Vista™, Windows® Server 2008 and Windows 7) Register this machine to the WIA Driver.
NOTE: The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver.
1
Click Start, Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras. For Windows 7, in the search box, type scanners and cameras, and then click Scanners and Cameras. In Windows 8, click Search in charms, and then Settings, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click View scanners and cameras in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2-34
Preparation before Use
2
Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press Properties.
2
NOTE: If Windows Security and User Account Control are displayed, no trouble should be found with operation after installing the driver and software we have provided. Continue installation.
3
When the machine is connected with the USB cable, click the Settings tab and select Image Compression and the Compression Level. If user login administration is invalid, go to Step 5.
When the machine is connected with the network cable, go to Step 4.
4
Select the checkbox beside Authentication, enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters) and then click OK.
NOTE: When the machine's IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.
5
Click Close. The machine is registered to the PC.
2-35
Preparation before Use
Embedded Web Server RX If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Embedded Web Server RX. This section explains how to access Embedded Web Server RX, and how to change security settings and the host name. For details on Embedded Web Server RX, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
NOTE: To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. Login User Name
Admin
Login Password
Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive). Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Embedded Web Server RX are as follows. Setting
Description
Administrator
General User
Device Information
The machine's structure can be checked,. Configuration, Counter, About Embedded Web Server RX
○
○
Job Status
Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history. Printing Jobs Status, Printing Job Log, Sending Job Status, Scheduled Jobs, Sending Job Log, Storing Job Status, Storing Job Log
○
○
Document Box
Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document box. Custom Box*1, Sub Address Box*2, Polling Box*2, Job Box Settings
○
○*3
Address Book
Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. Machine Address Book, External Address Book Settings, One Touch Key
○
○*3
Device Settings
Configure the advanced settings of the machine. Paper/Feed/Output, Original Settings, Energy Saver/Timer, Date/Time, System
○
-
Function Settings
Configure the advanced function settings. Common/Job Defaults, Copy, Printer, E-mail, Scan to Folder, FAX*2, Send and Forward, Forward Rules*2, Operation Panel
○
-
Network Settings
Configure the network advanced settings. General, TCP/IP, Protocol
○
-
Security Settings
Configure the security advanced settings. Device Security, Send Security, Network Security, Certificates
○
-
2-36
Preparation before Use
Setting Management Settings
Description Configure the advanced management settings. Job Accounting, Authentication, ID Card*4, Notification/Report, History Settings, SNMP, Reset
Administrator
General User
○
-
*1 This is displayed when the optional SSD is installed. *2 The fax function only shows P-C2665 MFP. *3 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user. *4 This is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is installed.
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX 1
Launch your Web browser.
2
In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address) https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server RX as well as their current status.
NOTE: If the screen “There is a problem with this website's security certificate.” is displayed, configure the certificate. For details on Certificates, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide. You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
3
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. When you log in to the machine as an administrator, you will see Device Settings, Function Settings, Network Settings, Security Settings, and Management Settings.
2-37
2
Preparation before Use
Changing Security Settings This section explains how to change the security settings.
1
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-37.
2
From the Security Settings menu, select the setting you want to configure. The configurable settings are Device Security, Send Security, Network Security, and Certificates.
NOTE: The configurable settings within Device Security, Send Security, and Network Security can also be configured from the machine's System Menu. For details, see Default Setting (System Menu) on page 8-1. For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
2-38
Preparation before Use
Changing Device Information Change the device information of the machine.
1
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-37.
2
From the Device Settings menu, select System.
3
Enter the device information, and then click Submit.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON. To restart the network interface card, click Reset in the Management Settings menu, and then click Restart Network in “Restart”.
2-39
2
Preparation before Use
E-mail settings By configuring the SMTP settings, you can send E-mail notifications on completed jobs. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. In addition, check the following. • • •
The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended. SMTP settings Use Embedded Web Server RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-37.
2
From the Function Settings menu, click E-mail.
2-40
Preparation before Use
3
Enter the appropriate values to each field. Setting
SMTP
Description Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol
Set SMTP protocol. Set the "SMTP (E-mail TX)" setting to [On] on the [Protocol Settings] page.
SMTP Server Name
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number
Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. Use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication Protocol
Set whether SMTP authentication is used. To use authentication, enter the user information for authentication.
SMTP Security
Set SMTP security. Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the [Protocol Settings] page.
POP before SMTP Timeout
Specify the time in seconds until the connection to the POP server times outs. This can be set when [POP before SMTP] is selected in "Authentication Protocol".
Connection Test
Tests to confirm that the settings are correct.
Domain Restriction
Set whether or not domains are restricted. Click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3
Set to receive e-mail at the machine. POP3 Protocol
Set POP3 protocol. Set the "POP3 (E-mail RX)" setting to [On] on the [Protocol Settings] page.
Check Interval
Specify the interval for checking for incoming e-mail in minutes.
Run once now
Click [Receive] to connect to the POP3 server immediately and check for incoming E-mails.
Domain Restriction
Set whether or not domains are restricted. Click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3 User Settings
Configure the settings for POP3 user accounts and the POP3 server. You can configure up to three users.
2-41
2
Preparation before Use
Setting E-mail Send Settings
4
Description
E-mail Size Limit
Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When Email size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size limit.
Sender Address
Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters.
Signature
Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults
Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default Settings] page.
Click Submit.
2-42
Preparation before Use
Registering Destinations You can register destinations to the machine's Address Book, from Embedded Web Server RX.
1
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-37.
2
From the Address Book menu, click Machine Address Book.
3
Click Add.
4
Enter the destination information. Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when registering via operation panel. Registering Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) on page 8-158
5
Click Submit.
2-43
2
Preparation before Use
Registering a Custom Box You can register a custom box from Embedded Web Server RX.
1
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-37.
2
From the Document Box menu, click Custom Box.
3
Click Add.
4
Enter the box details. Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when registering on the machine. For details, refer to Editing a Destination on page 8-168.
5
Click Submit.
2-44
Preparation before Use
Printing a document stored in a Custom Box A document stored in a Custom Box can be printed from Embedded Web Server RX.
1
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-37.
2
From the Document Box menu, click Custom Box.
2-45
2
Preparation before Use
3
Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.
4
Select the document you wish to print. Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.
5
Click Print. For settings that are configurable, refer to Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
2-46
Preparation before Use
Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette 1 and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
1
Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle.
2
Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled.
3
Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers.
4
Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table. If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam.
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled, turn the stack in the cassette upside down. Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag. If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name, refer to Paper on Appendix-13.
2-47
2
Preparation before Use
Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette 1 will hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). The following paper sizes are supported: A4, A5, A6, B5, Legal, Letter, Other (Folio, Oficio II, Executive, Statement, ISO B5, 16K, 216x340mm and Envelope C5) IMPORTANT: •
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults.)
•
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m2.
•
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2.
1
Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
IMPORTANT: When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
2
Turn the Paper Size Dial until the paper size you are using is visible. The paper size set here is recognized by the machine.
IMPORTANT: To use a paper size that does not appear on the paper size dial, set the paper size dial to "Other". The paper size must also be set from the operation panel. For details, see Specifying Paper Size and Media on page 2-57.
3
2-48
Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette.
Preparation before Use
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
2
4
Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
5
Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to be printed is facing up and the paper is not folded, curled, or damaged.
IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide. •
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams.
•
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below).
•
When loading the paper, keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up.
•
The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams.
•
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
2-49
Preparation before Use
6
Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine. Push it straight in as far as it will go.
There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the pointer will go down to the level of (empty).
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. IMPORTANT: When pulling out the cassette from the machine, confirm there is no paper left in the machine. Be sure that the paper is properly set in the cassette.
7
2-50
Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57.)
Preparation before Use
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement-R, 216x340mm, and 16K. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper. IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick. The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows. •
A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
•
Hagaki: 15 sheets
•
OHP film: 1 sheet
•
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62. When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.
1
Pull the Multi Purpose tray towards you until it stops.
2
When using legal size paper, pull out the support tray section of the multi purpose tray.
2-51
2
Preparation before Use
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides on the Multi Purpose tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the Multi Purpose tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper width guides to the corresponding mark.
4
Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go.
IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be uncurled before use. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
2-52
Preparation before Use
Loading Envelopes or Hagaki 5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray. Acceptable envelope and Hagaki sizes are as follows.
2
Acceptable Envelope
Size
Hagaki
148×100 (mm)
Oufuku Hagaki
148×200 (mm)
Youkei 2
162×114 (mm)
Youkei 4
235×105 (mm)
Monarch
3 7/8"×7 1/2"
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10)
4 1/8"×9 1/2"
Envelope DL
110×220 (mm)
Envelope C5
162×229 (mm)
Executive
7 1/4"×10 1/2"
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9)
3 7/8"×8 7/8"
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4)
3 5/8"×6 1/2"
ISO B5
176×250 (mm)
1
Pull the Multi Purpose tray towards you until it stops.
2
When using legal size paper, pull out the support tray section of the multi purpose tray.
2-53
Preparation before Use
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides on the Multi Purpose tray.
4
Align the paper with the paper width guides and insert as far as it will go.
5
For landscape form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap left. For portrait form envelopes, open the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing the front side.
2-54
Preparation before Use
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up.
2
Close the flap.
Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki)
Cardstock (Hagaki)
Open the flap. Portrait Landscape form form envelopes envelopes
NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face. IMPORTANT: If the Cardstock is warped, press on the warped area before putting it in the multi purpose tray.
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.
2-55
Preparation before Use
Paper stopper To use the sheet ejection stopper, open as shown below. (Example: Legal)
2-56
Preparation before Use
Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassette 1, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) is [Letter], and the default media type setting is [Plain]. To set the paper used in the cassette 1 when the paper is a frequently used paper, set the paper size using the paper size dial as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-48, and then set the paper type as described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57. If the paper does not appear on the paper size dial, set the paper size dial to "Other" as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-48, and then set the paper size and paper type as described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57 To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.) Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette 1 or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3), specify the paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Cassette 1 Selection Item
Selectable Size/Type
Paper Size
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, 216x340mm, 16K, ISO B5, Executive, Envelope C5 and Custom*
Media Type
Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Rough, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick (163 g/m2 or less), High Quality and Custom 1~8,
Paper feeder Selection Item
Selectable Size/Type
Paper Size
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, and Oficio II Metric size: A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216x340mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*
Media Type
Plain, Labels**, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Rough, Cardstock**, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***, Envelope**, Coated**, Thick (163 g/m2 or less), Thick** (163 g/m2 and more), High Quality and Custom 1~8
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8. ** Only on products with the paper feeder (multi purpose) installed. *** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18. If using the products equipped with the fax function, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Color, Rough, Envelope, Cardstock, Coated, Thick, High Quality and Custom
2-57
2
Preparation before Use When the paper size appears on the paper size dial
1
Turn the paper size dial to set the paper size.
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
4
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
6
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
2-58
Preparation before Use
7
Press the or key to select from [Cassette 1 Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].
NOTE: [Cassette 2 Set.] and [Cassette 3 Set.] are shown when the optional cassettes are installed. Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette (Cassette 2 or 3).
Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Type *********************
[
Exit
8
Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears.
9
Select [Cassette 1 Type].
]
Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled
10 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
11 Press the or key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
2-59
2
Preparation before Use When the paper size does not appear on the paper size dial
1
Turn the paper size dial to set "Other".
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
4
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
6
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
2-60
Preparation before Use
7
Press the or key to select from [Cassette 1 Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].
NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are shown when the optional cassettes are installed. Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette (Cassette 2 or 3).
Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [
Exit
8
Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears.
9
Press the or key to select [Cassette 1 Size].
]
NOTE: When the Paper Size Dial on the cassette is set to a standard paper size, this setting does not appear.
Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa
10 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.
11 Press the or key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size 2 Cassette 1 Type ********************* [
Exit
12 Press the or key to select [Cassette 1 Type].
]
2-61
2
Preparation before Use
Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled
13 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
14 Press the or key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size. When using other than a plain paper, specify the media type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Paper Size
Standard Sizes
Media Type
* **
Description Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216x340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom* Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (63 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Coated, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8**
Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size. Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 If using the products equipped with the fax function and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available media types are as shown below. Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Rough, Envelope, Cardstock, Coated, Thick, High Quality and Custom
2-62
Preparation before Use
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size ********************* 2 MP Tray Type [
Exit
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
5
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select [MP Tray Set.].
7
Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu appears.
8
Press the or key to select [MP Tray Size].
]
2-63
2
Preparation before Use
MP Tray Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa
MP Tray Size: a b > *ISO B5a ********************* ? Envelope #10 @ Envelope #9
MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size 2 MP Tray Type ********************* [
Exit
9
Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.
10 Press the or key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu.
11 Press the or key to select [MP Tray Type].
]
MP Tray Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough
12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.
13 Press the or key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu.
2-64
Preparation before Use
Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.
2
Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1
Open the document processor.
NOTE: Before opening the document processor, be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened. Keep the document processor open if the original is 25 mm or thicker.
2
Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point.
3
Close the document processor.
IMPORTANT: Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass. Do not close the document processor when the original is 25 mm or thicker. The connector of the document processor will be removed form the machine.
NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals.
CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
2-65
Preparation before Use
Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. Part Names of the Document Processor (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Document processor cover (2) Original width guides (3) Original table (4) Original eject table (5) Original stopper (6) Document processor open/close handle
(6)
Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals. Weight
50 to 120 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2)
Size
Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement
Capacity
Plain paper, Colored paper, Recycled paper, High quality paper: 50 sheets Thick paper (110 g/m2): 36 sheets Thick paper (120 g/m2): 33 sheets Art paper: 1 sheet
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. •
Soft originals such as vinyl sheets
•
Transparencies such as OHP film
•
Carbon paper
•
Originals with very slippery surfaces
•
Originals with adhesive tape or glue
•
Wet originals
•
Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
•
Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
•
Originals with cut-out sections
•
Crumpled paper
•
Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
•
Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
2-66
Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
1
Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.
2
Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam. Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure). Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
NOTE: When the original has been inserted to the correct position, an automatic document feeder image will appear in the message display.
2-67
2
Preparation before Use
2-68
3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations. • • • • • • • • • • • •
Login/Logout................................................................. 3-2 One-Touch Keys and Program Keys ............................ 3-3 Message Display .......................................................... 3-6 Copying ........................................................................ 3-7 Printing - Printing from Applications ........................... 3-21 Sending ...................................................................... 3-24 Preparation for sending a document to a PC ............. 3-31 Confirm Destination Screen ....................................... 3-40 Specifying Destination ................................................ 3-41 Scanning using TWAIN .............................................. 3-45 Canceling Jobs ........................................................... 3-46 Checking Remaining Toner and Paper....................... 3-47
3-1
Basic Operation
Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the Login User Name and Login Password to use the machine.
NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. In this event, log in with administrator privileges and change your Login User Name or Login Password. By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. The following are the default user's properties. User Name: Login User Name: Login Password: Access Level:
DeviceAdmin 2600 2600 Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, Login User Name and Login Password regularly for your security. Login
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
1
If the screen shown appears during operations, enter the Login User Name.
2
Press the key. The input cursor moves to Login Password.
3
Enter the Login Password.
]
Press the key to move the input cursor to Login User Name.
4
Check the Login User Name and Login Password are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Logout To logout from the machine, press the Logout to return to the Login User Name/password entry screen.
3-2
Basic Operation
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below. One-Touch Key Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-170. Entering Destination with One-touch Key
Address Entry: *
[
ABC Text
B b
1
In Address Entry, press the one-touch key where the desired destination is registered. Recalling from One-touch Keys 1 to 11 Press the one-touch key where the destination is registered.
]
Recalling from One-touch Keys 12 to 22 Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the indicator next to the keys, and then press the one-touch key where the destination is registered.
Ready to send. Dest.: 1 p :sally@###########N 1-sided 300x300dpi [ Duplex ] [ScanRes.]
2
Complete. appears, and the stored address is retrieved.
Program Keys Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing the applicable program key.
NOTE: The following functions are already registered in Program 1 key. This function allows you to copy the front and back sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5 size onto a single page. Although the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key, you can register the same settings using the Function Menu key. Zoom Options: Auto Zoom Combine: 2 in 1 Continuous Scan: On Original Size: Statement/A5 Paper Selection: Cassette 1
3-3
3
Basic Operation ID Card Copy is printed on the Program 1 key. When the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key, seal the label supplied with the machine and write the function name in it.
The procedure for using ID Card copying is explained below.
1
Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off.
NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the Energy Saver key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2
Place the original on the platen. Put the scanning side facedown in the center of Statement or A5 size scanning area.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading Originals on page 2-65.
Recalled.
3
Press the Program 1. The ID Card Copy function is recalled.
z Program 1
4
Press the Start key. Scanning begins.
5
Turn over the original on the platen and press the Start key.
6
After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying.
Registering Settings Registered. z Program 1
After making settings, press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the settings for 3 seconds. The current settings are registered to the selected program key.
3-4
Basic Operation
Changing and Deleting Settings Menu: a b 1 Overwrite ********************* 2 Delete
1
Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to change/delete are registered for 3 seconds. Menu appears.
3 2
Overwrite. Are you sure? z Program 1 [
Yes
] [
No
] To delete the registered settings, press the or key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to delete the registered settings.
Delete. Are you sure? z Program 1 [
Yes
] [
To replace the registered settings with the current settings, press the or key to select [Overwrite] and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to change the settings.
No
]
Recalling Settings Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.
3-5
Basic Operation
Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display.
Ready to copy. Copies: 1 A4q sA A4a 100% [ Zoom ] [ ]
1 2 3 4 5
1 6 7
Copier Screen
Ready to send. Dest.: 1 p :sally@###########N 1-sided [ Duplex ] [ ]
Send Screen
Reference number
Meaning
1
Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current menu whenever the operation panel is being used.
2
Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed. The meaning of each icon is as indicated below. A
The standard paper cassette is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as G , there is no paper is the cassette.
B C
The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as H or I , there is no paper is the cassette.
F
The Multi Purpose Tray is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as L , there is no paper is the Multi Purpose Tray.
3
Displays the size of the original(s).
4
Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be selected using the Left or Right Select keys.
5
Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the Left or Right Select keys.
6
Displays the number of copies.
7
Displays the paper size to be copied.
8
Displays the number of destinations.
9
Displays the destination.
3-6
8 9 4 5
Basic Operation
Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
Part that is operated
3
1
Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off.
NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the Energy Saver key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading Originals on page 2-65.
Ready to copy. Copies: 1 Letterq sA Lettera 100% [ Zoom ] [ Paper ]
3
The paper source for copying is the location displayed on the panel.
Paper source
When you need to change the paper source, use the Paper Selection menu. If [Auto] is selected, the most suitable paper source is automatically selected.
Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A A4a Plain 3 B A5a Plain
For specifying the paper source, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-4.
3-7
Basic Operation
4
Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black& White key to select the color mode.
NOTE: The setting of each key (color mode) is as follows. Auto Color key: Automatically detects whether the original is color or black & white and scans accordingly. Full Color key: Scans all documents in full color. Black& White key: Scans all documents in black & white.
5
Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. Specify the desired number up to 999.
6
Press the Start key to start copying.
7
Remove the finished copies from the top tray.
3-8
Basic Operation
Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.
Part that is operated
3
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Density: a b 4 v Lighter -1 5 w Normal 0 ********************* 6 y Darker +1
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Density].
3
Press the OK key. Density appears.
4
Press the or key to select your desired density.
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
3-9
Basic Operation
Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original.
Part that is operated
The table below shows the quality options. Image Quality Option
Description
Text+Photo
For originals with both text and photographs.
Photo
For photos taken with a camera.
Text
For originals primarily consisting of text.
Map
For maps, etc.
Printed Document
For documents printed from this machine.
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Original Image].
3
Press the OK key. Original Image appears.
4
Press the or key to select the image quality suited to the type of original.
3-10
Basic Operation
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
3
3-11
Basic Operation
Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.
Part that is operated
Auto Zoom Legal: 129 %
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size.
Letter-R
A5
A4: 141 % Statement-R: 64 %
A6: 70 %
Zoom Entry Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. 25 %
400 %
Standard Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
3-12
Basic Operation The following magnifications are available. Model Inch Models
Metric Models
Metric Models (Asia Pacific)
Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) Standard
100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Other
141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5)
Standard
100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Other
129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement)
Standard
100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Other
129% (Statement >> Letter), 90% (Folio >> A4), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement)
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto 3 Standard Zoom
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Zoom].
3
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
4
Press the or key to select the desired magnification. To copy in the same size as the original, select [100%]. To select automatic zoom, select [Auto].
3-13
3
Basic Operation To use fixed magnifications, select [Standard Zoom] and press the OK key. Standard Zoom appears. Press the or key to select the desired magnification. If you select [Other] and press the OK key, you can select from additional magnifications.
Standard Zoom: a b 1 400% ********************* 2 200% 3 141% A5 >> A4
Zoom Entry: (25 - 400) *****200%
To enter a magnification, select [Zoom Entry] and press the OK key. Zoom Entry appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the any magnification.
D b
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
6
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
3-14
Basic Operation
Duplex Copying Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books. The following modes are available.
3
Part that is operated
One-sided to Two-sided 5 4
5
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
3
3
4 1
2
2
1
Original
Copy
A
ghi def
ghi
abc
abc
def
abc
The following binding options are available.
B
ghi
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
def
Original
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation when turning the pages.
Copy
Two-sided to One-sided 1
1
2
2
Original
Copy
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. The document processor is required. The following binding options are available.
3-15
Basic Operation • •
Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180°.
Two-sided to Two-sided 5
5
3
3
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The document processor is required.
4
4 1
1
2
2
Original
Copy
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Statement, 16K, ISO B5, Oficio II, Executive, A4, B5, A5, Folio and Envelope C5. The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
Duplex: a b 1 *1-sided>>1-sided ********************* 2 1-sided>>2-sided 3 2-sided>>1-sided
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Duplex].
3
Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
4
Press the or key to select the desired duplex copying mode. If you select [1-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the finished copies and the original setting orientation.
Finish. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top
3-16
Basic Operation After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the finished copies and the original setting orientation.
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left
If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the original and the original setting orientation.
Orig. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the original and finished copies, and the original setting orientation.
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left
If you select [2-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the original and the original setting orientation.
Orig. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the finished copies and the original setting orientation.
Finish. Binding: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the original and finished copies, and the original setting orientation.
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left
5
3-17
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
3
Basic Operation
6
Scanning... Job No.: Page(s): [ Cancel ]
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
9999 1
When [1-sided>>2-sided] is selected, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) when original scanning finishes.
Set original and press Start key. Job No.: 9999 Page(s): 3 [ Cancel ] [End Scan]
3-18
Basic Operation
Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies.
Part that is operated
3
You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below. 3 2 1
3
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number.
3 2
2 1
1
3 2 1
Original
Copy
The procedure for using collate copying is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
Collate: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Collate].
3
Press the OK key. Collate appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
3-19
Basic Operation
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
6
Press the Start key Copying begins.
3-20
Basic Operation
Printing - Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printing system driver on your computer from the supplied DVD (Product Library).
1
Create a document using an application.
2
Click File and select Print in the application. The Print dialog box appears.
3
Click the button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list.
4
Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. Enter any number up to 999. When there is more than one document, select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers.
5
3-21
Click Properties button. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Basic Operation
6
Select the Basic tab and click the Print Size button to select the paper size to use for printing from the list. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the Media Type menu and select the media type.
7
Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type. To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray.
8
Select paper orientation, either Portrait or Landscape, to match the orientation of the document. Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document rotated 180°.
9
Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
10 Click OK button to start printing.
3-22
Basic Operation
Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display Help as explained below. •
•
Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about. Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Printing by AirPrint AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later products. You can connect to the machine and print without installing a printer driver. To allow the machine to be found when printing by AirPrint, you can set machine location information in Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
3-23
3
Basic Operation
Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network. A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps: •
Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.
•
Use Embedded Web Server RX (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the SMTP server, and the recipient.
•
Register the destination in the Address Book or One-touch keys.
•
When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up the PC Folder, contact your administrator.
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available. •
Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-25
•
Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-27
•
Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-27
•
Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program...page 5-30
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-44.
3-24
Basic Operation
Send as E-mail Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Part that is operated
3
NOTE: •
You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN.
•
Access the Embedded Web Server RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For details, see Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-36.
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
1
Press the Send key. Displays the screen for sending.
Send to: a b 1 p E-mail ********************* 2 G Folder(SMB) 3 H Folder(FTP)
Address Entry: *
[
ABC Text
B b
2
Press the or key to select [E-mail].
3
Press the OK key. Address Entry appears.
]
3-25
Basic Operation
4
Enter the destination e-mail address.
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41.
Ready to send. Dest.: 1 p :sally@###########N 1-sided 300x300dpi [ Duplex ] [ScanRes.]
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-77) is set to [On], a screen to confirm the entered e-mail address appears. Enter the same e-mail address again and press the OK key.
6
If there are additional destinations, press the Confirm/Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen. Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to confirm or delete the registered destinations. Press the or key to select a destination and press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the destination.
Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@###########N ********************* p aaaaaaaaa@########N p bbbbbbbbb@########N [ Add ] [ Exit ]
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen.
7
Press the Start key. Transmission starts.
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-77) is set to [On], the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3-40.
3-26
Basic Operation
Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP) Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC. Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Part that is operated
3
NOTE: •
Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.
•
Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server RX is On. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
1
Press the Send key. Displays the screen for sending.
Send to: a b 1 p E-mail 2 G Folder(SMB) ********************* 3 H Folder(FTP)
2
3-27
Press the or key to select [Folder(SMB)] or [Folder(FTP)].
Basic Operation
Host Name(SMB): Osaka SD*
[
ABC Text
A b
3
Press the OK key. Host Name(SMB) or Host Name(FTP) appears.
4
Enter the host name.
]
or
Host Name(FTP): Osaka SD*
A b
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the [
ABC Text
A b
Path: SD3\report*
[
ABC Text
Login User Name: Maury*
[
ABC Text
Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO*
[
]
ABC Text
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41.
5
Press the OK key. Path appears.
6
Enter the path name. Consider, that the share name but not the folder name on the destination PC has to be typed in.
7
Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.
8
Enter the Login User Name. You have to enter the account name of the destination PC.
9
Press the OK key. Login Password appears.
]
C b S
]
A b
]
10 Enter the Login Password. You have to enter the password of the account on the destination PC.
Check the connection. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
No
11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
]
3-28
Basic Operation
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-77) is set to [On], screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear. Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens. Data to be entered are as follows.
3
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. Contact your administrator and check your Login User Name or Login Password. For send to folder (SMB)
Item
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Host Name (SMB)*
Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data.
Up to 64 characters
Path
Share name For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: "share name\folder name in shared folder"
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name
User name to access the PC For example, abcdnet\james.smith
Up to 64 characters
Login Password
Password to access the PC
Up to 64 characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format “host name: port number” (e.g., SMBhostname: 140).
For send to folder (FTP)
Item
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Host Name (FTP)*
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to 64 characters
Path
Path for the file to be stored For example, "User\ScanData". If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name
FTP server log-in user name
Up to 64 characters
Login Password
FTP server log-in password
Up to 64 characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name: port number” (e.g., FTPhostname: 140).
3-29
Basic Operation
Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@###########N 0667640000 ********************* 0667741234 [ Add ] [ Exit ]
12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a connection with the entered destination.
If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 3 reappears. Check and reenter the destination.
13 If there are additional destinations, press the Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can be specified.
Dest. Confirm.: a b OSAKA SD *********************
[
Add
] [
Exit
14 Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to confirm the registered destinations. Press the or key to select a destination and press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the destination.
]
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen.
15 Press the Start key. Transmission starts. NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-77) is set to [On], the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3-40.
3-30
Basic Operation
Preparation for sending a document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
3
Checking what to enter for [Host Name] Check the name of the destination computer.
1
From the Start menu, select Computer and then System Properties. Check the computer name in the window that appears. In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select Properties. The System Properties dialog box appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears and check the computer name. In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click Computer from Libraries, and then select Properties. If there is a workgroup All characters appearing in "Full computer name" should be entered in Host Name. (Example: PC4050) If there is a domain The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full computer name" should be entered in Host Name. (Example: pc4050)
2
After checking the computer name, click the (Close) button to close the System Properties screen. In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen.
3-31
Basic Operation Checking what to enter for [Login User Name] Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1
From the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Accessories and then Command Prompt. In Windows 8, display Apps on Search in charms on the Start screen, and select Command Prompt. The Command Prompt window appears.
2
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then click Enter. Screen example: user name "james.smith" and domain name "ABCDNET"
Creating a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group. 1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and then Folder Options.
Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools. In Windows 8, select Settings in charms on Desktop, and select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and then Folder Options.
3-32
Basic Operation 2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced settings.
3
In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended) in Advanced settings. 3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen.
1
Create a folder on the local disk (C).
NOTE: For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the local disk (C).
2
Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing. Click the Advanced Sharing button. The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears. In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security... (or Sharing).
3
Select the Share this folder checkbox and click the Permissions button. The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box appears. In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click the Permissions button.
3-33
Basic Operation
4
Click the Add button.
5
Enter the user name in the text box and click the OK button.
6
Select the entered user, select the Change and Read permissions, and click the OK button. In Windows XP, go to step 8.
NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.
7
3-34
Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen.
Basic Operation
8
Click the Security tab and then click the Edit button. In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then click the Add button.
3
9
Proceed in the same way as in step 5 to add a user to Group or user names.
10 Select the added user, select the Modify and Read & execute permissions, and then click the OK button.
3-35
Basic Operation
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges. Checking file and printer sharing
1
From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security, and Allow a program through Windows Firewall.
NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2
Click Change settings, select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox, and click OK.
1
From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security, and Check firewall status.
Adding a port
3-36
Basic Operation
2
Click Advanced settings.
3 3
Click Inbound Rules.
4
Click New Rule.
5
Select Port and click Next.
3-37
Basic Operation
6
Select TCP, select Specific local ports, enter "445", and click Next.
7
Select Allow the connection and click Next.
8
Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click Next.
3-38
Basic Operation
9
Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.
3
NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista, follow the procedure below to set the port. 1 In Windows XP, from Start button on the Windows, select Control Panel, and then Windows Firewall. In Windows Vista, from Start button on the Windows, select Control Panel, Security, and then Turn Windows Firewall on or off. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button. 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button. 3 Specify Add a Port settings. Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port. Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select TCP for "Protocol". 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.
In Windows 8, follow the procedure below to set the port. 1 In charms on Desktop, click Settings, Control Panel, System and Security, and then Windows Firewall. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button. 2 Configure the settings, refer to Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) on 3-36.
3-39
Basic Operation
Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-77) is set to [On], Check through the all destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed.
Part that is operated
Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen.
Destination List: a b p Morgan@###########N ********************* 0667640000 0667741234 [ Cancel ] [ Next ]
1
Press the or key to check all destinations. The OK key can be pressed to check details or delete the selected address. To add a destination, press [Cancel] (the Left Select key) to return to the previous screen.
p Morgan@########Na b 1 Detail 2 Delete
Press Start key.
2
After the checking is finished, press [Next] (the Right Select key). Press Start key. is displayed on the screen.
[ Cancel ] If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet checked, the screen displays Check the destination list through the end. and returns to the Destination List screen. Check all destinations.
Check the destination list through the end.
3-40
Basic Operation
3
Place the original on the platen or in the document processor, and press the Start key. Transmission starts.
Specifying Destination When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys.
Part that is operated
Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
Select Addr Book: a b t Address Book ********************* t Ext Address Book [
Exit
]
Address Book: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
1
In the basic screen for sending, press the Address Book key. The Select Addr Book menu appears.
NOTE: If external address book is not registered, [Ext Address Book] is not displayed.
2
Press the or key to select [Address Book] and then press the OK key. Address Book appears. To use an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext Address Book].
3
Press the or key to select the desired user or group, and then press the OK key. If you select a user, the list of destinations registered to the user appears.
l Fiala: a b 0667643277 ********************* p fiala@###########.N SMB-PC [ Menu ]
If you select a group, proceed to step 5.
3-41
3
Basic Operation
4
Press the or key to select the desired destination and then press the OK key.
5
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below. Search in Address Book
Address Book: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Select ********************* 2 Detail 3 Search(Name)
A b
Search(Name): ma* S [
ABC Text
1
In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Search(Name)] and then press the OK key. A search screen appears.
3
Enter the characters you want to search.
4
Press the OK key. The address book appears with the user that starts with the entered character string at the top.
]
Address Book: a b l Maury ********************* l Morgan l Sally [ Menu ]
3-42
Basic Operation Search in Extended Address Book
Ext Address Book: a b l Fiala ********************* l Maury l Morgan [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Select 2 Detail 3 Search *********************
Search(Name): ma* S [
Menu
] [
A b
ABC Text
1
3 2
Press the or key to select [Search] and then press the OK key. A search screen appears.
3
Enter the characters you want to search. If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and then the OK key, Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition. Select the desired item for each and then press the OK key.
]
Ext Address Book: a b l Maury ********************* l Morgan l Sally [ Menu ]
In Ext Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
4
Press the OK key. The address book appears with the user that starts with the entered character string at the top.
NOTE: If you first open the external address book, the search screen appears first. Then, operate from step 3.
Choosing by One-Touch Key Select the destination using the One-touch keys. In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry screen, press the one-touch key where the destination is registered.
NOTE: Refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-170 for more information on adding onetouch keys.
3-43
Basic Operation
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Only on products with the fax function installed). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation. No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100 Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 5 SMB and FTP FAX : Up to 100 Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time.
3-44
Basic Operation
Scanning using TWAIN This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the same way.
1
Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2
Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software. Network
3
Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens. For settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box, see Help for each application software.
USB
4
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
5
Click the Scan button The document data is scanned.
3-45
3
Basic Operation
Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.
Job Cancel List: a b 1 Print Job List ********************* 2 Send Job List 3 Store Job List [ Exit ] Print Job List: a b 0008 Copy s ********************** 0009 W maury's data s 0010 W MicrosoftworN s [ Resume ] [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail ********************* 2 Cancel Job
Job will be canceled. Are you sure? z 0008 Copy [
Yes
] [
No
1
During a printing or sending job, press the Stop key. The Job Cancel List menu appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job but does not pause a sending job.
2
Press the or key to select the type of job you want to stop, and then press the OK key. An output queue of the selected job type is displayed.
3
Press the or key to select the job you want to stop, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Cancel Job] and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
5
Press [Yes] (the Right Select key). The screen displays Canceling.... and returns to the output queue of the selected job type after the job is canceled.
]
To cancel other jobs, repeat steps 3 to 5.
3-46
Basic Operation
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette.
Checking Remaining Toner Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
b
Toner Status: C VVV w E Y VVVVE
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Toner Status].
3
Press the OK key. Toner Status appears. The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one of 10 levels.
M VVV w E K VV w EE
Checking Remaining Paper Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Paper Status: Cassette 1: Lettera Plain
C b 1/ 4 Empty
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Paper Status].
3
Press the OK key. Paper Status appears. Press the or key to switch the display of remaining paper amount among the main unit cassette, optional cassette (if installed) and Multi Purpose tray.
3-47
3
Basic Operation
3-48
4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying. • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Original Size ................................................................. 4-2 Paper Selection ............................................................ 4-4 Original Orientation....................................................... 4-8 EcoPrint ...................................................................... 4-10 Combine Mode ........................................................... 4-11 Continuous Scan ........................................................ 4-14 Job Finish Notice ........................................................ 4-15 File Name Entry.......................................................... 4-17 Print Override ............................................................. 4-18 Color Selection ........................................................... 4-19 Color Balance ............................................................. 4-20 Sharpness .................................................................. 4-22 Background Density ................................................... 4-23 Saturation ................................................................... 4-25
4-1
Copying Functions
Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process.
Part that is operated
The following options are available. Item Standard Sizes
*
How to Select Select from standard sizes, envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals*.
Sizes Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom
For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.
Use the procedure below to select the original size.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Original Size].
4-2
Copying Functions
Original Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq
Original Size: a b > *ISO B5q ********************* ? Envelope #10 @ Envelope #9
5
Press the OK key. Original Size appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
7
4-3
Press the Start key to start copying.
4
Copying Functions
Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.
Part that is operated
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8).
Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A Lettera Plain 3 B Customa Plain
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Paper Selection].
5
Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired paper size. If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
4-4
Copying Functions
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
8
Press the Start key to start copying.
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Category Paper Size
Media Type
*
** ***
Item
How to Select
Sizes
Standard Sizes
Select from the standard size, envelope, postcard or the custom sized paper
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom*
Size Entry
Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2**.
Inch models Horizontal: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models Vertical: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments), Horizontal: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough, Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size (Custom), refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11. The input units can be changed in the System menu. Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-27. For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-16).
4-5
4
Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A A4a Plain 3 B A5a Plain
MP Tray Set.: a b 1 *Standard Size ********************* 2 Size Entry
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Paper Selection].
5
Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.
6
Press the or key to select [MP Tray Set.].
7
Press the OK key. MP Tray Set. appears.
8
Press the or key to select [Standard Size] or [Size Entry] and press the OK key, select the desired paper size, and then press the OK key. If you select [Size Entry], using the numeric keys to enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key, and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the OK key.
Size Entry(Y): D b (5.83 - 14.02) x 11.49 " ******
Media Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough
9
Press the or key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
4-6
Copying Functions
10 Place paper in the multi purpose tray. 11 Press the Start key to start copying. If Add paper in Multi Purpose tray. is displayed during the copying process, add paper in the multi purpose tray, and then press the OK key. Copying then resumes.
4
4-7
Copying Functions
Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions. •
Duplex
•
Combine mode
When placing originals on the platen
[Top Edge Top]
[Top Edge Left]
When placing originals on the document processor
[Top Edge Left]
[Top Edge Top]
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-30.
4-8
Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left *********************
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4 4
Press the or key to select [Orig.Orientation].
5
Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left].
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
8
4-9
Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [EcoPrint].
5
Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
7
4-10
Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be indicated.
Part that is operated
4
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement and 16K.
2-in-1 Mode For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet. The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Original
Copy
Orientation of Original Platen
Document processor
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
4-11
Copying Functions
4-in-1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Original
Copy
Orientation of Original Platen
Document processor
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None
Solid
Dotted
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.
1
4-12
Press the Copy key.
Positioning Mark
Copying Functions
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
Combine: a b 1 *Off 2 2 in 1 ********************* 3 4 in 1 [ Detail ]
2 in 1 Layout: a b 1 *g L to R f T to B ********************* 2 e R to L
Border Line: a b 1 * None ********************* 2 l Solid Line 3 m Dotted Line
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left *********************
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Combine].
5
Press the OK key. Combine appears.
6
Press the or key to select [2 in1] or [4 in 1].
7
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key).
8
Press the or key to select the desired layout and then press the OK key.
9
Press the or key to select the desired border line type and then press the OK key.
10 Press the or key to select the orientation of the original and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
11 Press the Start key. Scanning begins. If the original is placed on the platen, replace the original and press the Start key. After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying.
4-13
4
Copying Functions
Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Continuous Scan].
4
Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
5
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
6
Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key.
7
Place the next original and press the Start key. Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals. After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying.
4-14
Copying Functions
Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.
NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. Example of Job Finish Notice
To:
[email protected]
Subject:
1234 Job end report mail
Job No.:
000002
Result:
OK
End Time:
Wed 28 Apr 2010 14:56:08
File Name:
doc28042010145608
Job Type:
Copy
-----------------------------------------------1234 [00:c0:ee:d0:01:14] ------------------------------------------------
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [JobFinish Notice].
4-15
4
Copying Functions
JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
Destination: a b 1 *Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry
Address Book: a b p Fiala ********************* p Maury p Morgan [ Menu ]
5
Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key.
7
Press the or key to select [Address Book] or [Address Entry], and then press the OK key.
8
If you select [Address Book], select [Address Book] on the next screen and press the OK key, and then select the notice destination. Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination. If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of the notice destination.
Address Entry: B b ******@abcdefg.jp
[
ABC Text
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on ]
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
9
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
10 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the selected destination.
4-16
Copying Functions
File Name Entry Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
File Name Entry: A b File_2010* S ABC [ Text ]
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [File Name Entry].
5
Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.
6
Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional Info. appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7
Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and then press the OK key.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
8
4-17
Press the Start key to start copying.
4
Copying Functions
Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
Print Override: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Print Override].
3
Press the OK key. Print Override appears.
4
Press the or key to select [On].
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed, the machine is put into the interruption copy mode, and the basic screen appears.
6
Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion as a normal copy job. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job.
4-18
Copying Functions
Color Selection Select the color mode for copying. To select the color mode, you can also select from the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black & White key.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Color Selection: a b 1 *Auto Color ********************* 2 Full Color 3 Black & White
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Color Selection].
5
Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired color mode and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
7
4-19
Press the Start key to start copying.
4
Copying Functions
Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying. This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density on page 3-9. Refer to the sample image in Color balance adjustment on Appendix-23. Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Color Balance: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
Color Balance: a b 1 Cyan ********************* 2 Magenta 3 Yellow
Cyan: a b 1 *-5 ********************* 2 -4 3 -3
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Color Balance].
5
Press the OK key. Color Balance appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On].
7
Press the OK key. A selection menu for the color to be adjusted appears.
8
Press the or key to select the color to be adjusted.
9
Press the OK key. The color adjustment menu appears.
4-20
Copying Functions
10 Press the or key to select the color intensity. A larger negative value makes the color fainter, and a larger positive value makes the color more intense.
11 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
12 Press the Start key to start copying.
4-21
4
Copying Functions
Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen]. * Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. Refer to the sample image in Appendix-24. Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Sharpness: a b 1 *-3(Unsharpen) ********************* 2 -2 3 -1
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Sharpness].
5
Press the OK key. Sharpness appears.
6
Press the or key to adjust the sharpness. A larger negative value decreases the sharpness, and a larger positive value increases the sharpness.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
8
4-22
Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
Background Density Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the density of the ground color.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color copying when the a black & white original has been detected.
4
Original
Copy
The setting items are as follows. Item
Description
Off
Does not adjust the ground color.
Auto
Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.
Manual
Manually adjust the density in 5 levels. When [Manual] is selected, press [1 (Lighter)] to [5 (Darker)] to adjust the background density.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Backgrnd Density].
4-23
Copying Functions
Backgrnd Density: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Auto 3 Manual
Manual: a b 3 3 4 4 5 *5 (Darker) *********************
5
Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Off], [Auto] or [Manual].
7
Press the OK key. When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears. Press the or key to select [1 (Lighter)] to [5 (Darker)] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
8
4-24
Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. The procedure for adjusting the color saturation is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
Saturation: a b 1 *-3(Grayish) ********************* 2 -2 3 -1
1
Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Saturation].
5
Press the OK key. Saturation appears.
6
Press the or key to adjust the color saturation. A larger negative value reduces the saturation, resulting in paler color in the copy. A larger positive value increases the saturation, resulting in more vivid color.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
8
4-25
Press the Start key to start copying.
4
Copying Functions
4-26
5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Original Size ................................................................. 5-2 Sending Size ................................................................ 5-4 Zoom ............................................................................ 5-6 Duplex Sending ............................................................ 5-8 Original Orientation..................................................... 5-10 File Format ................................................................. 5-12 File Separation ........................................................... 5-14 Original Image ............................................................ 5-15 Adjusting Density........................................................ 5-16 Scan Resolution ......................................................... 5-17 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection ........... 5-18 Continuous Scan ........................................................ 5-19 File Name Entry.......................................................... 5-20 Subject and Body Entry .............................................. 5-21 Sharpness .................................................................. 5-22 Background Density ................................................... 5-23 WSD Scan .................................................................. 5-25 Job Finish Notice ........................................................ 5-27 FTP Encrypted TX ...................................................... 5-29 Scanning Image using Application ............................. 5-30
5-1
Sending Functions
Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process.
Part that is operated
Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.
Item
Detail
Standard Sizes
Select from standard sizes, Hagaki and Custom Original Size *.
*
Size Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom
Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size, refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Original Size].
5-2
Sending Functions
Original Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq
Original Size: a b > *ISO B5q ********************* ? Envelope #10 @ Envelope #9
5
Press the OK key. Original Size appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
5 7
5-3
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).
Part that is operated
The table below lists the sizes. Item
Detail
Size
Standard Sizes
Select from Same as Original Size, Standard Size, envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals*.
Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter, Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4 and Youkei 2
*
For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following table. Original Size and the size you wish to send as are
the same
different
Original Size
Specify as necessary
Specify as necessary
Sending Size
Select [Same as OrigSize]
Select the required size
Zoom
Select [100%] (or [Auto])
Select [Auto]
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
5-4
Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Sending Size: a b 1 *Same as OrigSize ********************* 2 Letter 3 Legal
Sending Size: a b ? *ISO B5 ********************* @ Envelope #10 [ Envelope #9
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Sending Size].
5
Press the OK key. Sending Size appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired sending size.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-5
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5
Sending Functions
Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.
Part that is operated
The table below lists the available options. Item
Detail
100%
No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)
Auto
Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size. When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and zooming cannot be used. Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper. Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Select the transmission size.
4
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Zoom].
5-6
Sending Functions
Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto
6
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
7
Press the or key to select [100%] or [Auto] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5
Sending Functions
Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.
Part that is operated
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type. Original
Type
Binding
1-sided Sheet Original
1-sided
—
2-sided Sheet Original
2-sided
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Duplex: a b 1 *1-sided ********************* 2 2-sided
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Duplex].
5
Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
5-8
Sending Functions
6
Press the or key to select [1-sided] or [2sided]. If you select [2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key), select the binding edge and press the OK key, and then select the original setting orientation on the next screen.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-9
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5
Sending Functions
Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen. •
1-sided / 2-sided Selection
When placing the original on the platen
[Top Edge Top]
[Top Edge Left]
When placing the original on the document processor
[Top Edge Left]
[Top Edge Top]
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Orig.Orientation].
5-10
Sending Functions
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left *********************
5
Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left].
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-11
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5
Sending Functions
File Format Select the file format of the image to send.
Part that is operated
The table below lists the file formats and their details. File Format PDF
Color mode
Adjustable range of image quality
Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ B&W), Full Color, Grayscale
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Black and White PDF/A-1a
-
Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ B&W), Full Color, Grayscale Black and White
PDF/A-1b
-
Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ B&W), Full Color, Grayscale Black and White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) -
Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ B&W), Full Color, Grayscale Black and White
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) -
XPS
Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, Grayscale
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
JPEG
Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, Grayscale
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
High Comp. PDF
Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ B&W), Full Color, Grayscale
Comp. Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Black and White
-
NOTE: You cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode.
5-12
Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
File Format: a b 1 *PDF ********************* 2 TIFF 3 XPS [ Detail ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [File Format].
5
Press the OK key. File Format appears.
6
Press the or key to select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG] or [High Comp. PDF]. [Details] (the Right Select key) can be pressed to select the PDF/A file format. If full color or grayscale is selected for the scanning color mode, press [Details] (the Right Select key) to select the image quality.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-13
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5
Sending Functions
File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files. Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
File Separation: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Each Page
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [File Separation].
5
Press the OK key. File Separation appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Each Page].
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. The scanned originals are sent in files of one page each.
NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the file name.
5-14
Sending Functions
Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Item
Detail
Text+Photo
Text and photos together.
Photo
For photos taken with a camera.
Text
Only text, no photos.
OCR
For documents to be read by OCR.
Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Original Image].
5
Press the OK key. Original Image appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired image quality.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-15
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5
Sending Functions
Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.
Part that is operated
The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Density: a b 4 w Lighter -1 5 y Normal 0 ********************* 6 z Darker +1
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Density].
5
Press the OK key. Density appears.
6
Press the or key to select your desired density.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-16
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
Part that is operated
5
The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Scan Resolution: a b 3 200x400dpi S.Fin 4 *300x300dpi ********************* 5 400x400dpi U.Fin
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Scan Resolution].
5
Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired scan resolution.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-17
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/B&W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White. Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Color Selection: a b 1 *Auto(Color/Gray) ********************* 2 Auto(Color/B&W) 3 Full Color
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Color Selection].
5
Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
6
Press the or key to select the desired color mode.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-18
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Continuous Scan When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
Press the Send key.
2
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
5 3
Press the or key to select [Continuous Scan].
4
Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
5
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
6
Specify the destination.
7
Place the original, and press the Start key.
8
Place the next original, and press the Start key. Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure. When you have scanned all the originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start sending.
5-19
Sending Functions
File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the document name. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
File Name Entry: A b File_2010* S ABC [ Text ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [File Name Entry].
5
Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.
6
Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional Info. appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7
Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and then press the OK key.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-20
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Subject and Body Entry When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
B b
Subject Entry: *
[
ABC Text
1
Press the Send key.
2
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
5
3
Press the or key to select [Subject/Body].
4
Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears.
5
Enter the subject and press the OK key.
]
NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject.
Body Entry: *
[
B b
6
Enter the body and press the OK key.
NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the ABC Text
body.
]
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
7
5-21
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When scanning penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear scanning data can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When scanning images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen]. * Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. Refer to the sample image in Appendix-24. Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
Sharpness: a b 1 *-3(Unsharpen) ********************* 2 -2 3 -1
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Sharpness].
5
Press the OK key. Sharpness appears.
6
Press the or key to adjust the sharpness. A larger negative value decreases the sharpness, and a larger positive value increases the sharpness.
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
8
5-22
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
Background Density Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the density of the ground color.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color sending when the a black & white original has been detected.
5 Original
Scanning Image
The setting items are as follows. Item
Description
Off
Does not adjust the ground color.
Auto
Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.
Manual
Manually adjust the density in 5 levels. When [Manual] is selected, press [1 (Lighter)] to [5 (Darker)] to adjust the background density.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Backgrnd Density].
5-23
Sending Functions
Backgrnd Density: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Auto 3 Manual
Manual: a b 3 3 4 4 5 *5 (Darker) *********************
5
Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Off], [Auto] or [Manual].
7
Press the OK key. When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears. Press the or key to select [1 (Lighter)] to [5 (Darker)] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying.
8
5-24
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
Sending Functions
WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer. To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-178) must be set to [On] in the network settings. Installing the driver
1
Select Start button of the Windows display, and then Network.
2
Select the machine displayed Multifunctional Devices, and then right-click Install. Installing of the driver starts.
3
After installing the driver, click Close.
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
Procedure using this machine
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending.
Send to: a b 2 G Folder(SMB) 3 H Folder(FTP) 4 P WSD Scan *********************
WSD Scan: a b 1 From Computer 2 From Oper. Panel ********************* [
Exit
3
Press the or key to select [WSD Scan].
4
Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears.
5
Press the or key to select [From Oper. Panel].
]
5-25
5
Sending Functions
Select Computer: a b P Computer01 ********************* P Computer02 P Computer03 [ Cancel ] [ Detail ]
Press Start Key. P :Computer01
6
Select the destination computer from the computer list. Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the information of the selected computer.
7
Press the OK key to confirm the destination, and then press the Start key. Transmission starts.
NOTE: To change the destination computer, press the Back key and then press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This brings you back to step 6.
NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer, press [From Computer] in step 5 and then scan the original from the computer.
5-26
Sending Functions
Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
Destination: a b 1 *Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry
Address Book: a b p Fiala ********************* p Maury p Morgan [ Menu ]
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
5 4
Press the or key to select [JobFinish Notice].
5
Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key.
7
Press the or key to select [Address Book] or [Address Entry], and then press the OK key.
8
If you select [Address Book], select [Address Book] on the next screen and press the OK key, and then select the notice destination. Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination.
5-27
Sending Functions If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of the notice destination.
Address Entry: A b ******@abcdefg.jp*
[
ABC Text
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on ]
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
9
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address.
5-28
Sending Functions
FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen. Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.
Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ]
FTP Encrypted TX: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen.
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [FTP Encrypted TX].
5
Press the OK key. FTP Encrypted TX appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending.
NOTE: Click Security Settings -> Network Security in the Embedded Web Server RX. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
5-29
5
Sending Functions
Scanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable or Network cable and install the TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setting TWAIN Driver on page 2-33 or Setting the WIA Driver (Windows Vista™, Windows® Server 2008 and Windows 7) on page 2-34. The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver. Operate the WIA Drivers in the same manner.
1
Connect the machine to a PC via a network.
NOTE: For WIA, in addition to connection via a network, the machine can also be connected to a PC by USB cable.
2
Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen.
3
Use the TWAIN-compatible application to scan from your computer.
NOTE: When the Login User Name and Login Password entry screen appears, enter them and click the OK button.
4
5-30
Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan. The scanned data will be sent to your computer.
6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box. • • • • •
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory................. 6-2 Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ..... 6-5 Removing USB Memory ............................................... 6-7 Printing from a Custom Box.......................................... 6-8 Printing from a Job Box .............................................. 6-16
6-1
Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer.
Limitations •
The following file types can be printed: •
PDF file (Version 1.7)
•
TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
•
JPEG file
•
XPS file
•
PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
•
Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.
•
Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot. We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used.
Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Polling Box
USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ]
1
Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot.
2
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [USB Memory].
4
Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.
6-2
Document Box
5
Press the or key to select the file you want to print. Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed.
USB Memory: a b N Store File i Folder-1 j File-1 g ********************* [ Menu ] [ Select ]
6
Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it.
When you want to print additional files, repeat steps 5 to 6 to select them.
USB Memory: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Delete
Ready to print. Copies: sA A4a 1-sided [ Duplex ] [ Paper
7
Press the OK key. A menu appears.
8
Press the or key to select [Print].
9
Press the OK key. The basic screen appears. Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print settings, refer to Copying on page 3-7 and Copying Functions on page 4-1.
1
]
10 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file begins.
JPEG/TIFF Print Sets the print mode for JPEG/TIFF files. The default setting is [Paper Size].
Function Menu: a b 1 Collate g ********************* 2 Paper Selection T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
1
Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2.
2
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print].
6-3
6
Document Box
JPEG/TIFF Print: a b 1 *Paper Size g ********************* 2 Image Resolution T 3 Print Resolution T
4
Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print appears.
5
Press the or key to select the desire print mode. The print modes are as follows: Paper Size (scaled to fit the paper size) Image Resolution (matched to the image resolution) Print Resolution (matched to the print resolution)
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
XPS FitTo Page If you select [On] in this setting, XPS data is scaled to fit the paper size during printing. If you select [Off], the data is printed at its original size.
Function Menu: a b 1 Collate g ********************* 2 Paper Selection T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ]
XPS FitTo Page: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2.
2
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [XPS FitTo Page].
4
Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
6-4
Document Box
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format.
NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
1
Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot .
6
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Polling Box
USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ]
2
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [USB Memory].
4
Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Store File].
NOTE: To save the data in the folder of USB memory, press the or key to select the folder, and then press [Select] (the Right Select key). The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
6-5
Document Box
Ready to scan.
6
Press the OK key. The basic screen appears. Change the original type, file format, etc., as necessary. For changing scan settings, refer to Sending Functions on page 5-1.
7
Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
A4q 1-sided 300x300dpi [2-sided ] [ScanRes.]
IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory, ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-7.
6-6
Document Box
Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Polling Box
USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ]
Menu: 1 Memory Detail 2 Remove Memory
a b
1
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [USB Memory].
3
Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.
4
Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). A menu appears.
NOTE: This is the image on the screen when a folder is selected. [Open] is not displayed when a file is selected.
USB memory can be safely removed.
[
OK
5
Press the or key to select [Remove Memory].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation message appears.
7
Press [OK] (the Right Select key) or remove the USB memory. The screen returns to the Document Box menu.
]
6-7
6
Document Box
Printing from a Custom Box Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. IMPORTANT: To use a Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine. The SSD must be formatted from the machine. For more information, refer to Format SSD on page 8-64.
NOTE: To create a Custom Box, refer to Custom Box creation on page 8-86. The setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Embedded Web Server RX. For more information, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Custom Box display Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Polling Box
Custom Box: a b 0001x Dandoko ********************* 0002x DANDOKO box 0003x DBox [ Menu ]
1
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Custom Box].
3
Press the OK key. The Custom Box menu appears.
Sorting the Custom Box list When user login administration is enabled, it is possible to sort the list display into either Box Number order or Box Owner order. 1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the Menu: a b Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
1 Open ********************* 2 Detail 3 Sort(No.)
2
Press the or key to select [Sort(No.)] or [Sort(Name)].
3
Press the OK key. The Menu screen reappears.
6-8
Document Box Searching Custom Boxes It is possible to search for a Custom Box using either the Box number or Box name. 1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the Menu: a b Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
1 Open ********************* 2 Detail 3 Sort(No.)
Search(No.): a b (0001 - 1000) 0001 ********
2
Press the or key to select [Search(No.)] or [Search(Name)].
3
Press the OK key. The Search(No.) screen or the Search(Name) screen appears.
6
Searching is possible using the methods below: •
Searching with Box numbers...6-9
•
Searching with Box names...6-10
Searching with Box numbers
Menu: a b 1 Open ********************* 2 Detail 3 Sort(No.)
Search(No.): a b (0001 - 1000) 0001 ********
1
In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Search(No.)].
3
Press the OK key. The Search(No.) screen appears.
4
Enter the Box number to be found and press OK key. A search is done for the Box number entered.
6-9
Document Box Searching with Box names
Menu: a b 1 Open ********************* 2 Detail 3 Sort(No.)
a b
Search(Name): Box* S [
ABC Text
1
In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Search(Name)].
3
Press the OK key. The Search(Name) screen appears.
4
Enter the Box name to be found and press OK key. A search is done for the Box name entered.
]
File operations (Printing, deleting and moving files) It is possible to print files stored in a Custom Box, to delete them or to move them to a different Custom Box. The following operations are possible: •
Box number/Box name (Select a File)...6-11
•
Select/Deselect All Files...6-11
•
Print a File...6-12
•
Print a File (Changes to the print settings)...6-12
•
Delete a File...6-14
•
Moving files...6-14
•
Check File Details...6-15
Custom Box: a b 0001x Dandoko ********************* 0002x DANDOKO box 0003x DBox [ Menu ]
x 0001 Dandoko: a b j AAAA T ********************* j BBBB T j CCCC T [ Menu ] [ Select ]
1
In the Custom Box list screen, press or key to select a Custom Box.
2
Press the OK key. The machine displays a list of files stored in the Custom Box.
NOTE: If the screen for entering a password is displayed then enter the password using the numeric keys and then press the OK key.
6-10
Document Box Box number/Box name (Select a File) To print/delete a file in the Custom Box, first select the file to be printed or deleted.
x 0001 Dandoko: a b j AAAA g ********************* j BBBB T j CCCC T [ Menu ] [ Select ]
1
Press or key to select the file to be printed/ deleted.
2
When [Select] (the Right Select key) is pressed, the file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file. Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] (the Right Select key) again to cancel the selection.
NOTE: To select all files, follow the steps of Select/ Deselect All Files on page 6-11. Select/Deselect All Files All files in the Custom Box are selected.
x 0001 Dandoko: a b j AAAA T ********************* j BBBB T j CCCC T [ Menu ] [ Select ]
Menu: a b 1 Select All ********************* 2 Clear All 3 Search(Name)
x 0001 Dandoko: a b j AAAA g ********************* j BBBB g j CCCC g [ Menu ] [ Select ]
1
Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
2
In the Custom Box list screen, press the or key to select [Select All] and then press the OK key.
When there is a file not checked in the Custom Box, all files will be checkmarked. Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] (the Right Select key) again to cancel the selection.
NOTE: When [Clear All] is selected, the checkmarks are all removed.
6-11
6
Document Box Print a File Print the file(s) selected in the Custom Box.
x 0001 Dandoko: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Print(ChangeSet) 3 Delete
Ready to print. Copies: 1
1
In the file list screen, select the item and press the OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Print].
3
Press the OK key. The Copies menu screen appears. If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed, use the numeric keys or press the or key to set the number of copies to be printed.
NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, enter the account ID in the login screen that appears. The Copies menu screen appears after login.
4
Accepted. Job No. :
9999
Press the Start key. The message Accepted. appears and printing begins. When [On] is selected in the Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after printing) on page 8-94, the selected file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed.
Print a File (Changes to the print settings) To change the print settings for a file selected in a Custom Box and print it.
x 0001 Dandoko: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Print(ChangeSet) 3 Delete
1
In the file list screen, select the item and press the OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Print(ChangeSet)].
6-12
Document Box
Ready to print. Copies: 1 sA A4a 1-sided [ Duplex ] [ Paper ]
3
Press the OK key. The Copies menu screen appears. If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed, use the numeric keys or press the or key to set the number of copies to be printed. Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print settings, refer to Copying on page 3-7 and Copying Functions on page 4-1.
NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, enter the account ID in the login screen that appears. The Copies menu screen appears after login.
4
Accepted. Job No. :
9999
Press the Start key. The message Accepted. appears and printing begins. When [On] is selected in the Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after printing) on page 8-94, the selected file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed.
Del. after Print (Delete data after printing setting) Use this setting to specify whether or not the file data is deleted after printing.
Function Menu: a b 1 Collate g ********************* 2 Paper Selection T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ]
Del. after Print: a b 1 *Off g ********************* 2 On
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 of Print a File (Changes to the print settings) on page 6-12.
2
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Del. After Print].
4
Press the OK key. Del. After Print appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Menu screen.
6-13
6
Document Box Delete a File Delete the file(s) selected in the Custom Box.
x 0001 Dandoko: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Print(ChangeSet) 3 Delete
Delete. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
No
1
In the file list screen, select the item and press the OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Delete].
3
Press the OK key. A confirmation message appears.
4
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The message Completed. appears and the selected file(s) are deleted.
]
Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the file list menu screen without deleting the file. Moving files A file can be moved to a different Custom Box.
x 0001 Dandoko: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Print(ChangeSet) 3 Delete
Custom Box: a b 0001x Dandoko ********************* 0002x DANDOKO box 0003x DBox
1
In the file list screen, select the item and press the OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Move].
3
Press the OK key. The Custom Box list appears.
4
Press the or key to select the destination Box.
6-14
Document Box
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the file list.
NOTE: If the screen for entering a password is displayed then enter the password using the numeric keys and then press the OK key. Check File Details Details for the file that is selected with the cursor will appear.
Menu: a b 1 Select All ********************* 2 Clear All 3 Search(Name)
Detail: C b File Name 1/5 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTN
1
In the file list screen, press [Menu] (the Left Select key).
2
Press the or key to select [Detail].
6
3
Press the OK key. Details for the file that is selected with the cursor appears. The details for the file cover 5 pages in all. Press the key to view to the next page or the key to return to the previous page.
[ Detail ]
In the File Name screen, if the file name is abbreviated because it cannot be displayed on one line, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to change the display to three lines.
Detail: D b ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU VWXYZ.txt
6-15
Document Box
Printing from a Job Box When RAM Disk Mode is enabled, you can use a Job Box to print. Job Box is a function that stores print data on the set RAM disk in the machine, enabling the data to be printed as needed from the operation panel of the machine. If an ID (4-digit number) is set when printing is executed from the computer, the data can be kept more confidential. When an ID is set, the ID must be entered in order to print the stored data from the machine. For the RAM disk settings, see RAM Disk Mode on page 8-63.
Private Print Private Print is used to allow printing only after the same 4-digit ID that was entered in the printer driver at the time of printing is entered at the operation panel. The data is erased after printing. For information on Private Print, see Help in the printer driver. The procedure for printing stored data is explained below.
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Polling Box
Job Box: a b 1 Private Print ********************* 2 Quick Copy
Private Print: a b l Fiala ********************* l Maury
1
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Job Box].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Box menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Private Print].
5
Press the OK key. The user selection menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select the user.
6-16
Document Box
l Fiala: a b o Data01 ********************* o Data02 o Data03 [ Menu ] [ Select ]
7
Press the OK key. The print file selection menu appears.
8
Press the or key to select the file to be printed, and then press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected file will be marked. If you need to add another file, repeat this procedure to select the file.
Menu: a b 1 Select All ********************* 2 Clear All 3 Detail
Fiala: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Delete
NOTE: To select all files, press Menu (the Left Select key) and select [Select All]. To deselect all files, select [Clear All]. To show file details, select [Detail].
9
Press the OK key. The file print and delete selection menu appears.
10 Press the or key to select [Print] and press the OK key.
NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it, select [Delete] and press the OK key. The file deletion confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. appears and the file is deleted.
Fiala:
b
11 The ID entry screen appears. Enter the ID and press the OK key.
1216S *********************
6-17
6
Document Box
Copies: a b (1 - 999,---) --- copies ********
12 The number of copies screen appears. Set the number of copies and press the OK key.
13 The file print confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted appears and printing begins.
Quick Copy mode This mode is used to print an additional copy of a document that has already been printed. If a document is printed with Quick Copy selected in the printer driver, the document will be simultaneously stored on the SSD. The required number of copies can be printed whenever needed from the operation panel. If more documents than the set maximum are stored, the oldest job will be overwritten each time a new job is stored. When the machine power is turned off, jobs stored in this mode are erased. For the number of documents that can be stored in Quick Copy mode, see Quick Copy Jobs on page 8-97.
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Polling Box
Job Box: a b 1 Private Print ********************* 2 Quick Copy
Quick Copy: a b l Fiala ********************* l Maury
1
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Job Box].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Box menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Quick Copy].
5
Press the OK key. The user selection menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select the user.
6-18
Document Box
l Fiala: a b o Data01 ********************* o Data02 o Data03 [ Menu ] [ Select ]
7
Press the OK key. The print file selection menu appears.
8
Press the or key to select the file to be printed, and then press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected file will be marked. If you need to add another file, repeat this procedure to select the file.
Menu: a b 1 Select All ********************* 2 Clear All 3 Detail
Fiala: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Delete
NOTE: To select all files, press Menu (the Left Select key) and select [Select All]. To deselect all files, select [Clear All]. To show file details, select [Detail].
9
Press the OK key. The file print and delete selection menu appears.
10 Press the or key to select [Print] and press the OK key.
NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it, select [Delete] and press the OK key. The file deletion confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. appears and the file is deleted.
Copies: M b (1 - 999,---) --- copies ********
11 The number of copies screen appears. Set the number of copies and press the OK key.
12 The file print confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted appears and printing begins.
6-19
6
Document Box
6-20
7 Status / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. • • • • • •
Checking Job Status..................................................... 7-2 Checking Job History.................................................... 7-8 Sending the Job Log History ...................................... 7-13 Pause and Resumption of Jobs.................................. 7-19 Canceling of Jobs ....................................................... 7-19 Device/Communication............................................... 7-20
7-1
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job, and Scheduled Job. The following job statuses are available. Screen
Job statuses to be displayed
Print Job
• • • • • • •
Copy Printer FAX reception Document Box E-mail reception Job Report /List Printing data from removable memory
Send Job
• • • • • •
FAX transmission PC (SMB/FTP) transmission E-mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Store Job
• •
Scan FAX
Scheduled Job
•
FAX
Print Job Status Screen
Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Print Job Status: a b 0008 Copy r 0009 maury’s data 0010 W aaaa [ Pause ] [ Menu ] 1
2
3
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Print Job Status].
3
Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. Press the or key to check the print queue.
4
7-2
Status / Job Cancel
0009 Detail: Status: Processing
Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job.
C b 1/9
NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy (number of pages and copies to be printed) Original Page (number of pages of the original) Color Mode
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen. No.
Item / Key
Detail
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Type
Icons that indicate the job type Copy job Printer job W FAX reception E-mail reception p Job from Document Box x Report / List j Data from Removable Memory Y
3
Job Name
Job Name or file name
7-3
7
Status / Job Cancel
No. 4
Item / Key Status
Detail Status of job r: s: no icon: R: S:
Printing Print Waiting Pausing print job or error Preferential print job is running Suspended because preferential print job is running
Send Job Status screen
Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Send Job Status: a b 0010 066764333 r N 0011 p Broadcast 0017 0324256345 N [ Cancel ] [ Menu ] 1
2
3
0011 Detail: Status: Processing
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Send Job Status].
3
Press the OK key. Send Job Status appears. Press the or key to check the send queue.
4
Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job.
C b 1/8
NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Destination
7-4
Status / Job Cancel
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the destination list. Press the or key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list. Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen. No.
Item / Key
Detail
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Type
Icons that indicate the job type Sending Job FAX Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP) Sending Job E-mail p Sending Job TWAIN2/WSD Scan P When broadcast sending is done, Broadcast is displayed next to the icon. When TWAIN send or WSD send is executed, "Application" appears next to the icon.
3
Destination
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or server name)
4
Status
Status of job r: no icon: s: X:
7-5
Sending Sending Waiting Pausing the job Stop sending
7
Status / Job Cancel Store Job Status screen
Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Store Job Status: a b r 0008 N Scan 0009 maury’s data 0010 aaaa [ Cancel ] [ Menu ] 1
2
3
0009 Detail: Status: Processing
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Store Job Status].
3
Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press the or key to check the store queue.
4
Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job.
C b 1/8
NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Sender Info. (destination information)
7-6
Status / Job Cancel
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen. No.
Display / Key
Details
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Type
Icons that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan N Storing Job FAX
3
Job Name
Job name or file name is displayed.
4
Status
Status of job s: no icon:
7-7
Storing Data Storing Waiting
7
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE: Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server RX or NETWORK PRINT MONITOR from the computer. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide or NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide.
Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Store Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs. The following job histories are available. Screen
Job histories to be displayed
Print Job
• • • • • • •
Copy Printer FAX reception E-mail reception Printing from a Document Box Job Report / List Printing data from removable memory
Send Job
• • • • •
FAX PC (SMB/FTP) E-mail Application Multiple destination
Store Job
• • • •
Scan FAX Printer USB Memory
Scheduled Job
•
FAX
Displaying Print Job Log Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Print Job Log].
7-8
Status / Job Cancel
Print Job Log: a 0006 maury’s da. 0007 tom’s da. 0008 susan’s da. [ Detail
b v
3
Press the OK key. Print Job Log appears. Press the or key to check the print log.
u u
] A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 7-2.
0006 Detail: Result: Error 00100
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed information of the selected print log.
C b 1/9
Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy (number of pages and copies to be printed) Original Page (number of pages of the original) Color Mode Sender Info. (destination information)
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
7-9
7
Status / Job Cancel
Displaying Send Job Log Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Send Job Log: a 0004 p Broadcast 0003 0756545865 0002 p Morgan@####N [ Detail
b u u v ]
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Send Job Log].
3
Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press the or key to check the send log. A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Send Job Status screen on page 7-4.
0004 Detail: Result: OK
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed information of the selected send log.
C b 1/9
Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Destination
7-10
Status / Job Cancel
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the destination list. Press the or key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list. Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen.
Displaying Store Job Log Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Store Job Log: a 0008 Scan 0009 maury’s data 0010 Y aaaa [ Detail
b u v v ]
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Store Job Log].
3
Press the OK key. Store Job Log appears. Press the or key to check the store queue.
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Store Job Status screen on page 7-6.
7-11
7
Status / Job Cancel
0009 Detail: Result: Error 10200
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed information of the selected job.
C b 1/9
Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Sender Info. (destination information)
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
7-12
Status / Job Cancel
Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Displaying Job Log History Menu Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Login
]
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. [ Exit ]
Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. 23:00 - 08:30
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Report].
3
Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.
IMPORTANT: When a time period to prohibit acceptance of jobs is set in timer settings, the screen will display Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. and return to the standby screen.
7-13
7
Status / Job Cancel
Report: a b 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. 4 Job Log History ********************* [ Exit ]
Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ]
4
Press the or key to select [Job Log History].
5
Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu appears.
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the or key to select [Destination].
2
Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears.
1
In the Destination menu, press the or key to select [Confirmation].
Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent. Use the procedure below to set the destination.
Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending 2 Send History 3 Destination ********************* [ Exit ]
Destination: a b 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [
Exit
]
Confirming Current Destination Destination: a b 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [
Exit
]
7-14
Status / Job Cancel
Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@########### *********************N
[
Exit
]
2
Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears.
NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination. Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
3
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic screen reappears.
1
In the Destination menu, press the or key to select [Register].
2
Press the OK key. Register appears.
Registering Destination Destination: a b 1 Confirmation 2 Register ********************* [
Exit
]
Register: a b 1 Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry
To select a destination from the address book, press the or key to select [Address Book] and then press the OK key. This displays the address book. Select your desired destination.
NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41. To directly enter a destination, press the or key to select [Address Entry] and then press the OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the destination address directly.
Completed.
3
7-15
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Destination menu.
7
Status / Job Cancel
NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has
Register: a b 1 Address Book ********************* 2 *Address Entry
been changed after you selected the destination from the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address.
Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged. Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.
Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ]
Auto Sending: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
Jobs:
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the or key to select [Auto Sending].
2
Press the OK key. Auto Sending appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On]. If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the number of jobs to be sent at a time.
D b
(1 - 16) ******16*jobs
4
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu.
Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually. Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually.
7-16
Status / Job Cancel
Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending 2 Send History ********************* 3 Destination [ Exit ]
Send the job log history. Are you sure? [
Yes
] [
No
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the or key to select [Send History].
2
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
] IMPORTANT: If no destination is registered, Enter destination is displayed. Refer to Registering Destination on page 7-15 and register the desired destination
Enter destination.
3
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted. is displayed and the job log is sent to the registered destination before the screen returns to the Job Log History menu.
Setting E-mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail. Use the procedure below to set the subject.
Job Log History: a b 2 Send History 3 Destination 4 Subject ********************* [ Exit ]
B b
Subject: %printer*
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the or key to select [Subject].
2
Press the OK key. Subject appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on [
ABC Text
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
]
3
Enter the subject.
4
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu.
7-17
7
Status / Job Cancel
Personal information in the job log When the job log is sent by e-mail, personal information can be including the job log of the user who logs in. Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.
Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ]
Personal Info.: a b 1 *Include ********************* 2 Exclude
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the or key to select [Personal Info.].
2
Press the OK key. Personal Info. appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Include] or [Exclude].
4
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu.
7-18
Status / Job Cancel
Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting. The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.
Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Print Job Status: a b 0008 Copy r ********************* 0009 maury’s data 0010 y aaaa [ Pause ] [ Menu ]
Pausing: a b 0008 Copy s ********************* 0009 maury’s data s s 0010 y aaaa [ Resume ] [ Menu ]
Yes
] [
No
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Print Job Status].
3
Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears.
7 4
Press [Pause] (the Left Select key). Printing is paused. When you press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to resume printing.
NOTE: When you press the Back key, a confirmation
Resume paused jobs. Are you sure?
[
1
screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to resume printing.
]
Canceling of Jobs For canceling jobs, refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3-46.
7-19
Status / Job Cancel
Device/Communication Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their status.
Check of Device Status Status: a b 7 Store Job Log 8 Scanner ********************* 9 Printer [ Pause ]
b
Scanner:
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [Scanner], [Printer], [FAX] or [SSD].
3
Press the OK key. This displays the status of the device selected in step 2.
4
Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status menu.
Ready.
b
Printer: Ready.
b
FAX: Ready. [
Log
]
The items you can check are described below. Scanner The information (scanning, pausing, etc.) is displayed. Printer Information (waiting, printing, etc.) is displayed.
7-20
Status / Job Cancel FAX The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed. SSD The information (optional SSD) is displayed.
Handling the Devices USB memory The status of the USB memory that is connected to the machine appears. This is also used when removing the USB memory from the machine.
Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Status: a b = Paper Status > USB Memory ********************* ? SSD [ Pause ]
C b 1/3
USB Memory: Capacity: 512.0MB
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
7 2
Press the or key to select [USB Memory].
3
Press the OK key. This displays the status of the USB memory.
[ Remove ] Press the or key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Capacity Used Area Free Space When you press [Remove] (the Left Select key), a confirmation screen appears and you can remove the USB memory.
USB memory can be safely removed.
[
OK
]
7-21
Status / Job Cancel
4
Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen returns to the Status menu.
USB keyboard This appears when a USB keyboard is connected to the machine, and indicates whether the keyboard can be used.
Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ]
Status: a b < Memory Card = USB Memory > USB Keyboard ********************* [ Pause ]
USB Keyboard:
C b
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears.
2
Press the or key to select [USB Keyboard].
3
Press the OK key. Indicates whether the USB keyboard can be used.
4
Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status menu.
Available
7-22
8 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Common Settings ......................................................... 8-2 Copy Settings ............................................................. 8-69 Sending Settings ........................................................ 8-75 Document Box Settings .............................................. 8-83 Printer Settings ........................................................... 8-99 Printing Reports/Sending Notice .............................. 8-117 Adjustment/Maintenance .......................................... 8-123 Date/Timer ................................................................ 8-141 Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) ..... 8-158 Restarting the System .............................................. 8-173 Network Setup .......................................................... 8-174 Network Security ...................................................... 8-185 Optional Network ...................................................... 8-196 NW InterfaceSend .................................................... 8-208 Interface Block Setting.............................................. 8-209 Security Level (Security Level setting) ..................... 8-214 Optional Functions.................................................... 8-215
8-1
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings Common settings include; •
How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2
•
Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-3
•
Default Screen …8-5
•
Sound …8-6
•
Display Bright. …8-7
•
Original/Paper Settings …8-8
•
Preset Limit …8-26
•
Switching Unit of Measurement …8-27
•
Error Handling …8-28
•
Function Defaults …8-30
•
Login Operation …8-62
•
RAM Disk Mode …8-63
•
Format SSD …8-64
•
Format SD Card …8-65
•
Optional Memory …8-66
•
TonerAlert Level …8-68
How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu 1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
2
8-2
The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
Switching the Language for Display [Language] You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below. You can optionally download messages in other languages. Contact your service technician for information.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Language: a b 1 *English ********************* 2 Deutsch 3 Français
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Language].
4
Press the OK key. The Language menu appears. The available languages are as follows: English Deutsch Français Español Italiano Nederlands Русский Português The optional languages are as follows: Optional language
Message display
Turkish
Türkçe
Greek
Ελληνικά
Polish
Polski
Czech
Èeský
Hungarian
Magyar
Finnish
Suomi
Hebrew Arabic
8-3
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional language
Message display
Swedish
Svensk
Danish
Dansk
Norwegian
Norsk
Romanian Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese If you are using one of the optional languages, it is displayed in place of Portugues.
5
Press the or key to select a language.
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
8-4
Default Setting (System Menu)
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Item
Description
Status
The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed) appears.
Copy
The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed) appears.
Send
The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed) appears.
FAX
The FAX screen (the screen shown when the FAX key is pressed) appears.
Document Box
The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed) appears.
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language 2 Default Screen ********************* 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Default Screen: a b 1 Status 2 *Copy ********************* 3 Send
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Default Screen].
4
Press the OK key. Default Screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select the default screen.
8-5
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting. Item
Value
Description
Key Confirmation
Off, On *
Emit a sound when the control panel are pressed.
Job Finish
Off*, On
Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.
Ready
Off*, On
Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Warning
Off, On*
Emit a sound when errors occur.
Keyboard Confirm
Off*, On
This sounds when the USB keyboard is used.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language 2 Default Screen 3 Sound ********************* [ Exit ]
Sound: a b 1 Buzzer ********************* 2 FAX Speaker 3 FAX Monitor [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Sound].
4
Press the OK key. Sound appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Buzzer].
8-6
Default Setting (System Menu)
Buzzer: a b 1 Key Confirmation ********************* 2 Job finish 3 Ready [ Exit ]
Key Confirmation: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
6
Press the OK key. Buzzer appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Key Confirmation].
8
Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu.
8
Display Bright. Set the brightness of the display. Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Display Bright.: a b 3 Darker -1 4 *Normal 0 ********************* 5 Lighter+1
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Display Bright.].
4
Press the OK key. Display Bright. appears.
8-7
Default Setting (System Menu)
5
Press the or key to select the display brightness from [Darker -3] to [Lighter +3].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units
Dimensions
Inch models
X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Custom Orig.Size].
8-8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Size Entry(Y): (1.97 - 8.50) x ***7.00*"
Size Entry(X): (1.97 - 14.02) J **11.23*"
D b
D b
6
Press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears.
7
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).
8
Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.
9
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
8
8-9
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size to be used as the default value. Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
Def. Orig. Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Def. Orig. Size].
6
Press the OK key. Def. Orig. Size appears.
7
Press the or key to select the paper size to be used as the default value.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
8-10
Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Inch models
Metric models
Dimensions Cassette:
X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Paper Feeder:
X: 3.63 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 6.38 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Multi Purpose Tray:
X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Cassette:
X: 105 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
Paper Feeder:
X: 92 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 162 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
Multi Purpose Tray:
X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source. Select media type for each paper size. Media type: Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 for Custom 1-8 for media type. Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
8-11
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
Custom PaperSize a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 2 Size 3 Cassette 3 Size
Size Entry(Y): D b (5.83 - 14.02) x ***14.02*"
Size Entry(X): Db (4.13 - 8.50) J ***8.50*"
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Custom PaperSize].
6
Press the OK key. The Custom PaperSize menu appears.
7
Select the paper source in which you want to set the custom size and press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears.
8
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).
9
Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.
10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X). 11 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
8-12
Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select the size and type of paper used when cassette 1 and the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) are used. A paper size setting can be specified for a cassette when the Paper Size Dial is set to "Other". The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Cassette 1 Selection Item
Selectable Size/Type
Paper Size
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, 216x340mm, 16K, ISO B5, Executive, Envelope C5 and Custom*
Media Type
Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Rough, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick (163 g/m2 or less), High Quality and Custom 1~8,
Paper feeder Selection Item Paper Size
Media Type
Selectable Size/Type Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, and Oficio II Metric size: A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216x340mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom* Plain, Labels**, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Rough, Cardstock**, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***, Envelope**, Coated**, Thick (163 g/m2 or less), Thick** (163 g/m2 and more), High Quality and Custom 1~8
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8. ** Only on products with the paper feeder (multi purpose) installed. *** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18. Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-13
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Cassette 1 Set.], [Cassette 2 Set.] or [Cassette 3 Set.]. Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette ([Cassette 2 or 3])
Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [
Exit
6
The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Cassette 1 Size].
]
NOTE: This item does not appear when the Paper Size Dial on the cassette is set to other than "Other".
Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa
8
Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.
9
Press the or key to select the paper size.
8-14
Default Setting (System Menu)
Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [
Exit
10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
]
11 Press the or key to select [Cassette 1 Type]. Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled
12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
13 Press the or key to select the paper type. 14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
8
8-15
Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Paper Size
Standard Sizes
Media Type
* **
Description Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216x340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom* Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (63 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Coated, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8**
Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size. Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
8-16
Default Setting (System Menu)
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size ********************* 2 MP Tray Type [
Exit
MP Tray Size: a b = 16Ka > ISO B5 ? *Envelope #10 *********************
MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size 2 MP Tray Type ********************* Exit
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [MP Tray Set.].
6
Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [MP Tray Size].
8
Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.
]
MP Tray Size: a b = 16Ka > ISO B5 ? *Envelope #10 *********************
[
4
8 9
Press the or key to select the paper size.
10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu.
]
11 Press the or key to select [MP Tray Type]. MP Tray Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough
12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.
8-17
Default Setting (System Menu)
13 Press the or key to select the paper type. 14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu. Paper Weight Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows. Paper types and weights : Default value : Available X: Not available Paper Weight Weight (g/m2), Media type
*
Light 60g/m2 to 63g/m2
Normal 1
Normal 2
Normal 3
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
60g/m2 to 74g/m2
75g/m2 to 90g/m2
91g/m2 to 105g/m2
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
136g/m2 to 163g/m2
164g/m2 to 220g/m2
Transparency
Extra Heavy
Duplex
Plain
Transparency
X
Vellum
X
Labels
X
Recycled
Preprinted
Bond
Cardstock
X
Color
Prepunched
Rough
Letterhead
Coated
Thick
Envelope
X
High Quality
Custom 1-8
*
Can be selected when the setting is [Light] to [Heavy 2].
8-18
Default Setting (System Menu) For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed. Item Duplex
Name
Description
Prohibit
Duplex printing not allowed.
Permit
Duplex printing allowed. Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
Media type Set.: K b 1 Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Media Type Set.].
6
Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select the paper type for which you want to make settings.
8-19
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Plain: a b 1 Paper Weight *********************
[
Exit
8
Press the OK key. The menu for the selected paper type appears.
9
Press the or key to select [Paper Weight].
]
Paper Weight: a b 1 Extra Heavy ********************* 2 *Heavy 3 3 Heavy 2
10 Press the OK key. The Paper Weight menu appears.
11 Press the or key to select the weight of paper. Plain: a b 1 Paper Weight *********************
[
Exit
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected paper type.
] When the selected paper type is [Custom 1 to 8], you can further set whether to enable or disable duplex and the name of the custom paper type.
Custom 1: a b 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Duplex 3 Name [ Exit ]
13 Press the or key to select [Duplex]. Duplex: a b 1 Permit ********************* 2 Prohibit [
Exit
14 Press the OK key. The Duplex menu appears.
]
15 Press the or key to select whether to enable or disable duplex.
8-20
Default Setting (System Menu)
Custom 1: a b 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Duplex 3 Name [ Exit ]
16 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type.
17 Press the or key to select [Name]. Name Entry: C b ################*S
[
ABC Text
18 Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed. Enter the name of the custom paper type.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on ]
Custom 1: a b 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Duplex 3 Name [ Exit ]
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
19 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type.
8
8-21
Default Setting (System Menu) Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray.
NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed. Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
Def. PaperSurce: a b 1 *Cassette 1 ********************* 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Def. PaperSource].
6
Press the OK key. Def. PaperSource appears.
7
Press the or key to select the paper source to be used preferentially.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type.
8-22
Default Setting (System Menu) Media for Auto Selection When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size. Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
Media for Auto: a b 1 Full Color ********************* 2 Black & White
Media for Auto: a b 1 All Media Type 2 *Plain ********************* 3 Transparency
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Media for Auto].
6
Press the OK key. The color selection menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Full Color] or [Black & White].
8
Press the OK key. Media for Auto appears.
8-23
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
9
Press the or key to select [All Media Type] or the paper type to be used for paper selection.
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority]. The table below lists the available settings and their details. Item
Description
Adj. PrintDirect
Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.
Speed Priority
Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation. Select this item when paper orientation is not important.
If you select [Adj. PrintDirect], load paper according to the steps below. Example: copying on Letterhead
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is supposed to be done, upward.
8-24
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ]
SpcialPaper Act.: a b 1 *Adj. PrintDirect ********************* 2 Speed Priority
SpcialPaper Act.: a b 1 Adj. PrintDirect 2 *Speed Priority *********************
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears.
8 5
Press the or key to select [SpcialPaper Act.].
6
Press the OK key. SpcialPaper Act. appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Adj. PrintDirect] or [Speed Priority].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
8-25
Default Setting (System Menu)
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Preset Limit: D b (1 - 999) **999*
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Preset Limit].
4
Press the OK key. The Preset Limit menu appears.
5
Press the or key to enter the number of copies.
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
8-26
Default Setting (System Menu)
Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Use the procedure below to change the input units.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Measurement: a b 1 *inch ********************* 2 mm
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Measurement].
4
Press the OK key. The Measurement menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [inch] or [mm].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
8-27
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type. Item
Description
1-sided
Printed in 1-sided
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Paper Mismatch Error Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper type set in the paper source when printing from your computer. Item
Description
Ignore
Printing continues.
Display Error
Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Error Handling].
8-28
Default Setting (System Menu)
Error Handling: a b 1 DuplexPaperError ********************* 2 PaperMismatchErr [
Exit
Error Handling: a b 1 DuplexPaperError 2 PaperMismatchErr ********************* Exit
Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [DuplexPaperError].
6
Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears.
7
Press the or key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu.
9
Press the or key to select [PagerMismatchErr].
]
DuplexPaperError: a b 1 1-sided 2 *Display Error *********************
[
4
]
PaperMismatchErr: a b 1 Ignore 2 *Display Error *********************
10 Press the OK key. PagerMismatchErr appears.
11 Press the or key to select the method to handle paper mismatch.
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu.
8-29
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Orig.Orientation Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
c Top Edge Top
Select the original's top edge at the top.
d Top Edge Left
Select the original's top edge at the left.
Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation. Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Orig.Orientation].
8-30
Default Setting (System Menu)
Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left *********************
6
Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
7
Press the or key to select [c Top Edge Top] or [d Top Edge Left] .
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Backgrnd(Copy) Select the Backgrnd(Copy) default. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
Off
Do not adjust background density.
Auto
Set to auto adjustment.
Manual (Darker 5)
Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.
Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd(Copy).
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
8-31
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Backgrnd(Copy): a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Auto 3 Manual(Darker 5)
5
Press the or key to select [Backgrnd(Copy)].
6
Press the OK key. Backgrnd(Copy) appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off], [Auto] or [Manual(Darker 5)].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Backgrnd(Send) Select the Backgrnd(Send) default. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
Off
Do not adjust background density.
Auto
Set to auto adjustment.
Manual (Darker 5)
Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.
Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd(Send).
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
8-32
Default Setting (System Menu)
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Backgrnd(Send): a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Auto 3 Manual(Darker 5)
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Backgrnd(Send)].
6
Press the OK key. Backgrnd(Send) appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off], [Auto] or [Manual(Darker 5)].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Con.scan-ExptFAX Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
Off
Continuous scan not performed
On
Continuous scan performed
Refer to page 4-14 for Continuous Scan. Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-33
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Con.scan-ExptFAX: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Con.scan-ExptFAX].
6
Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
Text+Photo
Text and photos together.
Photo
For photos taken with a camera.
Text
Only text, no photos.
Map
For maps, etc.
Printed Document
For documents printed from this machine.
8-34
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals for copying.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Orig.Image(Copy): a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
8 5
Press the or key to select [Orig.Image(Copy)].
6
Press the OK key. Orig.Image(Copy) appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text], [Map] or [Printed Document].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
8-35
Default Setting (System Menu) Original Image (Send) Set the default original document type for sending. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
Text+Photo
Text and photos together.
Photo
For photos taken with a camera.
Text
Only text, no photos.
for OCR
Image quality suitable for OCR software.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals for sending.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Orig.Image(Send): a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Orig.Image(Send)].
6
Press the OK key. Orig.Image(Send) appears.
8-36
Default Setting (System Menu)
7
Press the or key to select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text] or [for OCR].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi U.Fin (Ultra Fine), 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi S.Fin (Super Fine), 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Norm. (Normal). Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Scan Resolution: a b 1 200x100dpi Norm. ********************* 2 200x200dpi Fine 3 200x400dpi S.Fin
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
8
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Scan Resolution].
6
Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.
7
Press the or key to select [200x100dpi Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin], [300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin] or [600x600dpi].
8-37
Default Setting (System Menu)
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Color Selection Select the default color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.
Color mode
Description
Auto Color
Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black and white.
Full Color
Scan document in full color.
Black & White
Scan document in black and white.
Color mode
Description
Auto(Color/Gray)
Color and black & white originals are automatically detected. Color originals are scanned in full color, and black & white originals are scanned in shades of black & white.
Auto(Color/B&W)
Color and black & white originals are automatically detected. Color originals are scanned in full color, and black & white originals are scanned in binary black & white.
Full Color
Scan document in full color.
Grayscale
Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.
Black & White
Scan document in black and white.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-38
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Color Selection: a b 1 Copy ********************* 2 Send/Store
Copy: a b 1 *Auto Color ********************* 2 Full Color 3 Black & White
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Color Selection].
6
Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
8 7
Press the or key to select [Copy] or [Send/ Store].
8
Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
9
If the or key was pressed to select Copy, select [Auto Color], [Full Color], or [Black & White]. If Send or Save was selected, select [Auto (Color/ Gray)], [Auto (Color/B&W)], [Full Color], [Grayscale], or [Black & White].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
8-39
Default Setting (System Menu) File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below. File Format
Description
PDF
Send files in PDF format.
TIFF
Send files in TIFF format.
XPS
Send files in XPS format.
JPEG
Send files in JPEG format.
High Comp. PDF
Send files in High Comp. PDF format.
NOTE: Refer to page 5-12 for file formats. Use the procedure below to select the default file format.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [File Format].
8-40
Default Setting (System Menu)
File Format: a b 1 *PDF ********************* 2 TIFF 3 XPS
6
Press the OK key. File Format appears.
7
Press the or key to select [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG] or [High Comp. PDF].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available default settings are shown below. Item
Description
100%
Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).
Auto
Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size/ sending size.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
8-41
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto
5
Press the or key to select [Zoom].
6
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
7
Press the or key to select [100%] or [Auto].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set. The table below lists the additional information available. Item
Description
None
No additional information available.
Date
Adds date and time.
Job No.
Adds the job number.
Job No. + Date
Adds the job number plus date and time.
Date + Job No.
Adds date and time plus the job number.
NOTE: •
Refer to page 4-17 and page 5-20 for name entry.
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-42
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
File name Entry: A b doc 1* S ABC [ Text ]
Additional Info.: a b 1 None ********************* 2 Date 3 Job No.
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [File Name Entry].
6
Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. Enter the document name (up to 32 characters).
8 7
Press the OK key. Additional Info appears.
8
Press the or key to select [None], [Date], [JobNo.], [JobNo. + Date] or [Date + JobNo.].
9
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail.
NOTE: •
Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-25.
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.
8-43
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Subject Entry: K b abcdefghijklmnopqrstu vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ* S ABC [ Text ] Body Entry: a b abcdefghijklmnopqrstu vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ* ABC [ Text ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Subject/Body].
6
Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. Enter the e-mail subject (up to 60 characters). If you press the Back key, you can return to the Function Default menu.
7
Press the OK key. Body Entry appears. Enter email body text (up to 500 characters). If you press the Back key, you can return to Subject Entry.
8
8-44
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Default Setting (System Menu) Collate Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings. Item Collate
Description
Off
Collate not performed.
On
Collate performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 3-19 for Collate/Offset. Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Collate: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Collate].
6
Press the OK key. Collate appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8-45
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Off
No EcoPrint performed.
On
EcoPrint performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint. Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [EcoPrint].
8-46
Default Setting (System Menu)
EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
6
Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the JPEG/TIFF Print default. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Paper Size
Scaled to fit the paper size.
Image Resolution
Matched to the image resolution.
Print Resolution
Matched to the print resolution.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-3 for JPEG/TIFF Print. Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
8-47
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
JPEG/TIFF Print: a b 1 *Paper Size g ********************* 2 Image Resolution T 3 Print Resolution T
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print].
6
Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Paper Size], [Image Resolution] or [Print Resolution].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
XPS FitTo Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. Use the procedure below to set the default XPS FitTo Page setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-4 for XPS FitTo Page.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
8-48
Default Setting (System Menu)
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
XPS FitTo Page: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [XPS FitTo Page].
6
Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
8
File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files. Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
8-49
Default Setting (System Menu)
File Separation: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Each Page
5
Press the or key to select [File Separation].
6
Press the OK key. File Separation appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [Each Page].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu.
2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item
Description
g L to R f T to B
Arranges from left to right or top to bottom.
e R to L
Arranges from right to left.
Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
8-50
Default Setting (System Menu)
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
2 in 1 Layout a b 1 *g L to R f T to B ********************* 2 e R to L
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [2 in 1 Layout].
8
Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears.
9
Press the or key to select [g L to R f T to B] or [e R to L].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 4 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [4 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item
Description
h Right then Down
Arranges from upper left to right.
i Down then Right
Arranges from upper left to bottom.
j Left then Down
Arranges from upper right to left.
k Down then Left
Arranges from upper right to bottom.
Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-51
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
4 in 1 Layout: a b 1 *h Right then Down ********************* 2 i Down then Right 3 j Left then Down
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [4 in 1 Layout].
8
Press the OK key. 4 in 1 Layout appears.
9
Press the or key to select [h Right then Down], [i Down then Right], [j Left then Down] or [k Down then Left].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
8-52
Default Setting (System Menu) Border Line Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1 Layout] or [4 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item
Description
None
No border line.
l Solid Line
Draws solid border lines.
m Dotted Line
Draws dotted border lines.
n Positioning Mark
Puts a mark on the border line position.
Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
8 2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Border Line].
8-53
Default Setting (System Menu)
Border Line: a b 1 * None ********************* 2 l Solid Line 3 m Dotted Line
8
Press the OK key. Border Line appears.
9
Press the or key to select [ None], [l Solid Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Orig. Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:
Item
Description
o Left/Right
Left/right binding
p Top
Top binding
Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
8-54
Default Setting (System Menu)
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
Orig. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Orig. Binding].
8
Press the OK key. Orig. Binding appears.
8 9
Press the or key to select [o Left/Right] or [ p Top].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
8-55
Default Setting (System Menu) Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item
Description
o Left/Right
Left/right binding
p Top
Top binding
Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Finish Binding].
8-56
Default Setting (System Menu)
Finish. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top
8
Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears.
9
Press the or key to select [ o Left/Right] or [p Top].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Image Quality Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. Select the default value in the range from [1 Low(High Comp)] (high compression) to [5 High(Low Comp)] (low compression). Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
8
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
8-57
Default Setting (System Menu)
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
Image Quality: a b 1 *1 Low(High Comp) ********************* 2 2 3 3
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Image Quality].
8
Press the OK key. Image Quality appears.
9
Press the or key to select from [1 Low(High Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Color TIFF Comp. Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine. Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
8-58
Default Setting (System Menu)
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
Color TIFF Comp.: a b 1 *TIFF V6 ********************* 2 TTN2
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Color TIFF Comp.].
8
Press the OK key. Color TIFF Comp. appears.
8
9
Press the or key to select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. PDF/A setting You can set the default PDF/A setting used in the machine. The procedure for specifying the default PDF/A setting is explained below.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-59
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
PDF/A: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 PDF/A-1a 3 PDF/A-1b
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [PDF/A].
8
Press the OK key. The PDF/A menu appears.
9
Press the or key to select [Off], [PDF/A-1a], or [PDF/A-1b].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
8-60
Default Setting (System Menu) High Comp.PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Compression Ratio Priority
Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size.
Standard
Standard quality
Quality Priority
Image quality is given priority with larger file size.
Use the procedure below to select the default setting for High Comp.PDF.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ]
Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
8 2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Function Default].
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail Setting].
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears.
8-61
Default Setting (System Menu)
High Comp.PDF: a b 1 *Comp. Priority ********************* 2 Standard 3 Quality Priority
7
Press the or key to select [High Comp.PDF].
8
Press the OK key. The High Comp.PDF menu appears.
9
Press the or key to select [Comp. Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Login Operation Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled. Item
Description
Use Numeric Key
Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters.
Select Character
Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears.
Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Login Operation].
8-62
Default Setting (System Menu)
Login Operation: a b 1 *Use Numeric Key ********************* 2 Select Character
4
Press the OK key. Login Operation appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Use Numeric Key] or [Select Character].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box. The procedure for setting the RAM Disk Mode is explained below.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
RAM Disk Mode: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [RAM Disk Mode].
4
Press the OK key. RAM Disk Mode appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8-63
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
RAM Disk Mode: D b (1 - 64) **32* MB
Restart. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
No
6
Press the OK key. If [Off] is selected and the OK key is pressed, proceed to step 8. If [On] is selected, the RAM disk size screen appears.
7
Enter the size of the RAM disk with the numeric keys.
8
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
9
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is restarted.
]
Format SSD When an optional SSD is inserted into the machine for the first time, it must be formatted before use. This menu is displayed only when the SSD is installed on the machine.
NOTE: If the SSD is installed in the machine, the Document Box will be available. Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SSD. Formatting of the SSD must be executed from the machine. When the SSD has not yet been formatted, the Attention lamp flashes and Format SSD is displayed. Use the procedure below to format the SSD. When a new SSD is inserted in the machine's slot, Format SSD will appear on the message display.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Format SSD].
8-64
Default Setting (System Menu)
Format. Are you sure? z SSD [
Yes
] [
No
4
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The Formatting... screen appears and SSD formatting begins. Once the formatting ends, the Common Settings menu reappears. Press [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the Common Settings menu without formatting the SSD.
]
Format SD Card The machine is equipped with a slot for an SD card. A new SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the machine. Formatting allows data to be written to the SD card. IMPORTANT: Format SD Card is only displayed when an SD card is installed in the machine and protection is disabled.
NOTE: Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card. Formatting of the SD card must be executed from the machine. When a new SD card is inserted in the machine's slot, Format SD Card will appear on the message display.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Format SD Card].
8-65
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Format. Are you sure? z SD Card [
Yes
] [
No
4
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The Formatting SD card... screen appears and SD card formatting begins. Once the formatting ends, the Common Settings menu reappears. Press [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the Common Settings menu without formatting the SD card.
]
Optional Memory If optional memory is installed, you can specify whether most of the memory is allocated to the copy function or the print function. Item
Description
Normal
The optional memory is allocated to the copy function or the print function based on a previously selected setting.
Copy Priority
This allocates most memory to data spooling for sort copy. When copy priority is specified, the number of pages that can be printed in sort copying increases.
Printer Priority
The amount of memory allocated to RAM disk memory and the amount of memory allocated to drawing can be increased. When print priority is specified, the maximum value that can be set in RAM disk mode increases.
Use the procedure below to adjust the Optional Memory.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-66
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Optional Memory: a b 1 *Normal ********************* 2 Printer Priority 3 Copy Priority
Restart. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Memory].
4
Press the OK key. Optional Memory appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Normal], [Printer Priority] or [Copy Priority].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
8 No
]
7
8-67
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is restarted.
Default Setting (System Menu)
TonerAlert Level Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner. The procedure for setting the TonerAlert Level is explained below.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
TonerAlert Level: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
Toner Level: (5 - 100) 5 ********%
M b
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [TonerAlert Level].
4
Press the OK key. TonerAlert Level appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
If [On] is selected and the OK key is pressed, the Toner Level screen appears. If [Off] is selected and the OK key is pressed, proceed to step 8.
7
Press the or key or the numeric keys to set the level at which an alert will be displayed.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
8-68
Default Setting (System Menu)
Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions. •
Paper Selection …8-69
•
Auto Paper Selection …8-70
•
Auto % Priority …8-71
•
DP Read Action …8-72
•
Select Key Set …8-73
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Auto
Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals.
Def. PaperSource
Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-22).
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ]
Copy: a b 1 Paper Selection ********************* 2 AutoPaperSelect. 3 Auto % Priority [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Copy].
2
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Paper Selection].
8-69
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Paper Selection: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Def. PaperSource
4
Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Auto] or [Def. Paper Source].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu.
Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
MostSuitableSize
Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as OrigSize
Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ]
Copy: a b 1 Paper Selection ********************* 2 AutoPaperSelect. 3 Auto % Priority [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Copy].
2
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [AutoPaperSelect.].
8-70
Default Setting (System Menu)
AutoPaperSelect.:a b 1 *MostSuitableSize ********************* 2 Same as OrigSize
4
Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.
5
Press the or key to select [MostSuitableSize] or [Same as OrigSize].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu.
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/ zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off. Item
Detail
Off
No zoom performed (copied in original size).
On
Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ]
Copy: a b 1 Paper Selection ********************* 2 AutoPaperSelect. 3 Auto % Priority [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Copy].
2
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Auto % Priority].
8-71
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Auto % Priority: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
4
Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu.
DP Read Action You can set whether priority is given to speed or image quality when scanning an original on the document processor. The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Speed Priority. Item
Detail
Speed Priority
Priority is given to speed when scanning
Quality Priority
Priority is given to image quality when scanning
Use the procedure below to specify the DP Read Action.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ]
Copy: a b 1 Paper Selection ********************* 2 AutoPaperSelect. 3 Auto % Priority [ Exit ]
DP Read Action: a b 1 *Speed Priority ********************* 2 Quality Priority
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Copy].
2
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [DP Read Action].
4
Press the OK key. DP Read Action appears.
8-72
Default Setting (System Menu)
5
Press the or key to select [Speed Priority] or [Quality Priority].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu.
Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using copy functions. You can register one of the following functions to each key. •
None
•
Paper Selection
•
Collate
•
Duplex
•
Zoom
•
Combine
•
Original Size
•
Orig.Orientation
•
Original Image
•
Density
•
EcoPrint
•
Continuous Scan
•
File Name Entry
•
JobFinish Notice
•
Print Override
•
Color Selection
•
Color Balance
•
Sharpness
•
Backgrnd Density
•
Saturation
8
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-73
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Copy].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Copy: a b 1 Paper Selection ********************* 2 AutoPaperSelect. 3 Auto % Priority [ Exit ]
Select Key Set.: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [
Exit
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Select Key Set.].
4
Press the OK key. Select Key Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Left] or [Right].
6
Press the OK key. This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is selected.
7
Press the or key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Select Key Set. menu.
]
Left: a b 4 Duplex 5 *Zoom ********************* 6 Combine
This function is already registered.
2
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed.
8-74
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options. •
Select Key Set …8-75
•
Destination confirmation screen before transmission …8-77
•
Default Screen …8-78
•
Send and Forward …8-79
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using sending functions. You can register one of the following functions to each key. •
None
•
Color Selection
•
Original Size
•
Original Image
•
Scan Resolution
•
Sending Size
•
Zoom
•
Orig.Orientation
•
Continuous Scan
•
File Format
•
File Name Entry
•
Subject/Body
•
JobFinish Notice
•
FAX Resolution
•
FAX Direct TX
•
FAX Delayed TX
•
FAX RX Polling
•
FAX TX Report
•
Density
•
Duplex
•
FTP Encrypted TX
•
File Separation
•
Sharpness
•
Backgrnd Density
8
8-75
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ]
Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck 3 Default Screen [ Exit ]
Select Key Set.: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Send].
2
Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Select Key Set.].
4
Press the OK key. Select Key Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Left] or [Right].
6
Press the OK key. This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is selected.
7
Press the or key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Select Key Set. menu.
]
Left: a b 2 Color Selection 3 Original Size ********************* 4 Original Image
This function is already registered.
1
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed.
8-76
Default Setting (System Menu)
Destination confirmation screen before transmission You can specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears after the Start key is pressed or after a destination is added or edited before transmission. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Detail
Check beforeSend
Specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears before transmission.
Check New Dest.
Specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears when the destination is new.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ]
Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck 3 Default Screen [ Exit ]
DestinationCheck:a b 1 Check beforeSend ********************* 2 Check New Dest. [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Send].
8 2
Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [DestinationCheck].
4
Press the OK key. The destination confirmation menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Check before Send] or [Check New Dest.].
]
8-77
Default Setting (System Menu)
Check beforeSend:a b 1 *OFF ********************* 2 On
6
Press the OK key. The menu of the selected function appears. The screen when the Check before Send menu is selected is shown.
7
Press the or key to select the desired function.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the destination confirmation menu.
Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ]
Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck 3 Default Screen [ Exit ]
Default Screen: a b 1 *Destination ********************* 2 Address Book
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Send].
2
Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Default Screen].
4
Press the OK key. The Default Screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Destination] or [Address Book].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu.
8-78
Default Setting (System Menu)
Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images. Displaying Send and Forward Menu
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ]
Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck 3 Default Screen [ Exit ]
Send and Forward: a b 1 Forward ********************* 2 Destination
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Send].
2
Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Send and Forward].
4
Press the OK key. The Send and Forward menu appears.
1
In the Send and Forward menu, press the or key to select [Forward].
2
Press the OK key. Forward appears.
Forward Select whether to forward the original.
Send and Forward: a b 1 Forward ********************* 2 Destination
Forward: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
8-79
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
3
Press the or key to select [Off] or [on]. If [On] is selected and the OK key is pressed, the Forward Rule screen appears. If [Off] is selected and the OK key is pressed, proceed to step 6.
Forward: a b 1 p E-mail T ********************* 2 G Folder(SMB) T 3 H Folder(FTP) T [ Select ]
4
Press the or key to select the Forward Rule.
5
Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it. If you need to add the Forward Rule, repeat steps 4 to 5 to select them.
Send and Forward: a b 1 Forward ********************* 2 Destination
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send and Forward menu.
1
In the Send and Forward menu, press the or key to select [Destination].
2
Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears.
Setting the destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. Use the procedure below to set the destination.
Send and Forward: a b 1 Forward ********************* 2 Destination
Destination: a b 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [
Exit
]
8-80
Default Setting (System Menu) Confirming Current Destination
Destination: a b 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [
Exit
Exit
In the Destination menu, press the or key to select [Confirmation].
2
Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears.
]
Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@########### *********************N
[
1
]
NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination.Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
3
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic screen reappears.
1
In the Destination menu, press the or key to select [Register].
2
Press the OK key. Register appears.
Registering Destination
Destination: a b 1 Confirmation 2 Register ********************* [
Exit
]
Register: a b 1 Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry
To select a destination from the address book, press the or key to select [Address Book] and then press the OK key. This displays the address book. Select your desired destination.
NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41. To directly enter a destination, press the or key to select [Address Entry] and then press the OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the destination address directly.
Completed.
3
8-81
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Destination menu.
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Register: a b 1 Address Book 2 *Address Entry *********************
NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has been changed after you selected the destination from the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on 881 and reconfirm the destination address.
8-82
Default Setting (System Menu)
Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box. •
Select Key Set …8-83
•
Custom Box …8-85
•
Job Box …8-97
Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when printing from or saving to a document box. You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document box. Print •
None
•
Collate
•
Paper Selection
•
Duplex
•
EcoPrint
•
File Name Entry
•
JobFinish Notice
•
Print Override
•
Color Selection
•
Encrypted PDF
•
JPEG/TIFF Print
•
XPS FitTo Page
•
Del. afterPrint
8
Store •
None
•
Color Selection
•
Original Size
•
Original Image
•
Scan Resolution
•
Storing Size
•
Zoom
•
Orig.Orientation
•
Continuous Scan
•
File Format
•
File Separation
•
File Name Entry
8-83
Default Setting (System Menu) •
JobFinish Notice
•
Density
•
Duplex
•
Sharpness
•
Backgrnd Density
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Job Box [ Exit ]
Select Key Set.: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Store [
Exit
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Document Box].
2
Press the OK key. The Document Box menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Select Key Set.].
4
Press the OK key. Select Key Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Print] or [Store].
6
Press the OK key. This displays the flexible key selection screen for the function selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Print] is selected.
7
Press the or key to select [Left] or [Right].
8
Press the OK key. This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 7. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is selected.
]
Print: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [
1
]
Left: a b 1 None ********************* 2 Collate 3 Paper Selection
8-84
Default Setting (System Menu)
9
Press the or key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key.
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the flexible key selection screen. IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed.
This function is already registered.
Custom Box IMPORTANT: To use a Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine. The SSD must be formatted from the machine. For more information, refer to Format SSD on 8-64.
NOTE: On network compatible models, the creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Embedded Web Server RX.
8
Displaying Custom Box Menu
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Job Box [ Exit ]
Custom Box: a b 1 Detail/Edit ********************* 2 File Del. Time [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Document Box].
2
Press the OK key. The Document Box menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Custom Box].
4
Press the OK key. The Custom Box menu appears.
]
8-85
Default Setting (System Menu) Custom Box creation Create a Custom Box. Enter the Box Name and Box Number then it is possible to continue on and set the details of the Box.
NOTE: When user login administration is enabled, log in as a user with administrator authority. The procedure for Custom Box creation is explained below.
Custom Box: a b 1 Detail/Edit ********************* 2 File Del. Time [
Exit
1
In the Custom Box menu, press the or key to select [Detail/Edit].
2
Press the OK key. The Custom Box list appears.
3
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
4
In the Menu screen, select the [Add Box] and press the OK key. The Box Name Entry screen appears.
5
Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys.
]
Custom Box: a b 0001 q Dandoko ********************* 0002q DANDOKO box 0003q DBox [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Box
Box Name Entry: a b * S ABC [ Text ]
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
8-86
Default Setting (System Menu)
Box Number Entry: a b (0001 - 1000) /0003-
6
Press the OK key. The Box Number Entry screen appears.
7
Use the numeric keys or press the or key to enter the Box Number.
*[0000]:Auto
NOTE: Enter the Box Number as a four-digit number from 0001 - 1000.
q Box03:
a b 1 Exit ********************2 Detail
8
Press the OK key.
9
Press the or key to select [Detail] or [Exit] then press the OK key. To set the details of the Box, select [Detail] and proceed to Detailed box settings on page 8-87. If the details of the Box will not be set then select [Exit] and finish the operation.
Detailed box settings Set the details of the Box when necessary. The items to set are different between when user login administration is not enabled, when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with administrator authority and when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with user authority.
P b 1/9
Detail: Box Name: Box03 [
Edit
]
8-87
8
Default Setting (System Menu) The detailed settings for the Box are as shown below. User login On Setting
User login Off
Administ rator
Reference Page User
Box Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Box Name (Change the Box name) on 888
Owner
–
Yes
No
Owner (Owner settings) on 8-89
Permission
–
Yes
Yes
Permission (settings for the sharing of a Box) on 8-90
Box Password
Yes
Yes
Yes
Box Password (Box password setting) on 8-90
Box Number
Yes
Yes
Yes
Box number (Change of the Box number) on 8-91
Usage Restrict.
Yes
Yes
No
Usage Restrict. (Setting for maximum possible capacity usage) on 8-92
Auto File Del.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto File Del. (Setting for automatic file deletion) on 8-92
Overwrite Set.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Overwrite Set. (Setting of overwrite storage) on 8-93
Del. afterPrint
Yes
Yes
Yes
Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after printing) on 8-94
Yes: The setting can be changed. No: The setting cannot be changed. –: No setting Box Name (Change the Box name) Change the Box name.
P b 1/9
Detail: Box Name: Box03 [
Edit
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Box Name].
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). The Box Name Entry screen appears.
]
Box Name Entry: a b Box03* S ABC [ Text ]
8-88
Default Setting (System Menu)
3
Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
4
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Owner (Owner settings) When user login administration is enabled, set the owner of the Box. If the owner is not set then the owner name is displayed as -----.
P b 2/9
Detail: Owner: Smith
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Owner].
2
Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Owner setting screen appears.
[ Change ]
Owner: a b 1 Local User ********************2 Network User 3 None
3
Press the or key to select [Local User] or [Network User].
NOTE: When [Local User] is selected, select the user that you want to set as the owner and press the OK key. If the owner will not be set then select [None] and press the OK key.
Login User Name: *
[
ABC Text
a b
4
Press the OK key. The Login User Name screen appears.
5
Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys.
]
NOTE: Up to 64 characters can be entered.
8-89
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
6
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Permission (settings for the sharing of a Box) When user login administration is enabled, this setting determines whether or not a Box will be shared with other users.
P b 3/9
Detail: Permission: Shared
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Permission].
2
Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Permission screen appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Shared] or [Private].
4
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
[ Change ]
Permission: a b 1 *Shared ********************2 Private
Box Password (Box password setting) It is possible to set a password for a box and restrict the users who have access to it. Enter one if necessary.
NOTE: This setting is not displayed when user login administration is enabled and the Permission (settings for the sharing of a Box) on page 8-90 has been set to [Private].
P b 4/9
Detail: Box Password:
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Box Password].
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). The New Password entry screen appears.
[
New Password: *
[
Edit
]
a b S ABC Text
]
8-90
Default Setting (System Menu)
3
Enter the new password using the numeric keys.
NOTE: Up to 16 characters can be entered.
Confirm Password: a b * S
[
ABC Text
4
Press the OK key. The Confirm Password entry screen appears.
5
To confirm, re-enter the password to be registered. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
6
Press the OK key. If the password is correct, the setting is changed to the new password and the Detail menu screen reappears.
]
If the password is not correct, the display shows Incorrect password. and returns to the New Password screen, so enter again from the new password. Box number (Change of the Box number) Change the Box number.
P b 5/9
Detail: Box Number: 0002 [
Edit
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Box Number].
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). The Box Name Entry screen appears.
3
Use the numeric keys or press the or key to enter the Box Number.
]
Box Number Entry: a b (0001 - 1000) /0002-
NOTE: Enter the Box Number as a four-digit number from 0001 - 1000. If the display shows This box number is already registered., this Box Number is already in use. Register a different Box Number.
8-91
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
4
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Usage Restrict. (Setting for maximum possible capacity usage) It is possible to restrict the capacity of Boxes in order to preserve the SSD capacity. To limit the usage capacity, enter the maximum value (MB) using the numeric keys. The limit value will vary depending on the number of user Boxes that are created, but it is possible to enter the maximum between 1 and 30,000 (MB).
Detail: Usage Restrict.: 200MB
P b 6/9
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Usage Restrict.].
2
Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Usage Restrict. screen appears.
3
Enter the limit value using the numeric keys, the or key.
4
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
[ Change ]
Usage Restrict.: (1 - 30000) /**200-MB
a b
Auto File Del. (Setting for automatic file deletion) This automatically deletes the documents that have been saved after a fixed period. Set to [On] for the automatic deletion and then enter the number of days that the documents will be stored. Between 1 and 31 (days) can be entered. Set to [Off] if automatic deletion will not be used.
Detail: Auto File Del.: Off
P b 7/9
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Auto File Del.].
2
Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Auto File Del. menu screen appears.
3
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
[ Change ]
Auto File Del.: a b 1 *Off ********************2 On
8-92
Default Setting (System Menu)
NOTE: If [On] has been selected, set the number of days for storage as the [Period]. [Period] is only displayed if it has been set to [On].
Period: a b (1 - 31) /*7-day(s)
4
Press the OK key. The Period screen appears.
5
Enter the number of days for storage using the numeric keys, the or key.
6
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Overwrite Set. (Setting of overwrite storage) This setting is used to permit or prohibit the overwriting of old documents that have been stored for the storage of new documents.
Detail: Overwrite Set.: Permit
P b 8/9
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Overwrite Set.].
2
Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Overwrite Set. screen appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Permit] or [Prohibit].
4
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
[ Change ]
Overwrite Set.: a b 1 *Permit ********************2 Prohibit
8-93
8
Default Setting (System Menu) Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after printing) This automatically deletes the documents from the Boxes when the printing is complete.
Detail: Del. afterPrint: Off
P b 9/9
1
In the Detail menu screen, press the or key to select [Del. afterPrint].
2
Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Del. afterPrint screen appears.
3
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
4
Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen reappears.
[ Change ]
Del. afterPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************2 On
Editing Custom Boxes It is possible to change the detailed settings of the Custom Boxes.
Custom Box: a b 0001 q Dandoko ********************* 0002q DANDOKO box 0003q DBox [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit ***********************2 Delete 3 Add Box
a b 1/9
Detail: Box Name: Box03 [
Edit
]
1
In the Custom Box list screen, press the or key to select the Box to edit.
2
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The Menu screen appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Detail/Edit].
4
Press the OK key. The Detail screen appears.
NOTE: If the screen for entering a password is displayed then enter the password using the numeric keys and then press the OK key.
8-94
Default Setting (System Menu)
5
Press the or key to check each of the settings and make changes.
NOTE: For the method for making changes, refer to Detailed box settings on page 8-87.
6
When the editing is completed press the OK key. The Custom Box list screen reappears.
1
In the Custom Box list screen, press the or key to select the Box to delete.
2
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The Menu screen appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Delete].
4
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
5
To proceed with deleting the custom box, press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. appears and the custom box is deleted. The once deleting of the custom box ends, the Custom Box list screen reappears.
Deleting Custom Boxes It is possible to delete Custom Boxes.
Custom Box: a b 0001 q Dandoko ********************* 0002q DANDOKO box 0003q DBox [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit ***********************2 Delete 3 Add Box
Delete. Are you sure? z q Dandoko [
Yes
] [
No
]
Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the file list screen without deleting the custom box.
8-95
8
Default Setting (System Menu) Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes Set the time for documents stored in Custom Boxes to be automatically deleted.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Job Box [ Exit ]
Custom Box: a b 1 Detail/Edit ********************* 2 File Del. Time [
Exit
File Del. Time: Hour Min. /00-: 00
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Document Box].
2
Press the OK key. The Document Box menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Custom Box].
4
Press the OK key. The Custom Box menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [File Del. Time].
6
Press the OK key. The File Del. Time screen appears.
7
Use the numeric keys or press the or key to enter the hours and minutes.
]
a b
Press the or key to increase or decrease the figures. Use the or key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.
8
8-96
Press the OK key. The Custom Box Menu screen reappears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
Job Box Job Box settings can be set. Select settings for Quick Copy Jobs and Job Retention Deletion. Quick Copy Jobs sets the number of files that can be saved using Quick Copy. Job Ret. Deletion sets the period of time a job retention file can be saved. When a file has been saved for longer than the period, it is automatically deleted. Quick Copy Jobs The procedure for setting Quick Copy Jobs is explained below.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Job Box [ Exit ]
Job Box: a b 1 Quick Copy Jobs ********************* 2 JobRet. Deletion [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Document Box].
2
Press the OK key. The Document Box menu appears.
8 3
Press the or key to select [Job Box].
4
Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Quick Copy Jobs].
6
Press the OK key. The Quick Copy Jobs screen appears.
7
Enter the number of Quick Copy Jobs that can be saved with the numeric keys.
8
Press the OK key. The Job Box screen reappears.
]
Quick Copy Jobs: D b (0 - 300) ****0* job(s)
8-97
Default Setting (System Menu) Job Retention Deletion The procedure for setting Job Retention Deletion is explained below.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Document Box: a b 1 Custom Box ********************* 2 Sub Address Box 3 Job Box [ Exit ]
Job Box: a b 1 Quick Copy Jobs ********************* 2 JobRet. Deletion [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Document Box].
2
Press the OK key. The Document Box menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Job Box].
4
Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Job Ret. Deletion].
6
Press the OK key. The Job Retention Deletion screen appears.
7
Press the or key to select the period that jobs are retained.
8
Press the OK key. The Job Box screen reappears.
]
JobRet. Deletion:a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 1 hour 3 4 hours
8-98
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer Settings Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine. •
Emuration Set …8-99
•
Color Setting …8-102
•
EcoPrint …8-102
•
Override A4/LTR …8-103
•
Duplex …8-104
•
Copies …8-105
•
Orientation …8-107
•
Gloss Mode …8-108
•
Wide A4 …8-109
•
FormFeed Timeout …8-109
•
LF Action …8-110
•
CR Action …8-111
•
Job Name …8-112
•
User Name …8-113
•
Paper Feed Mode…8-114
•
Auto Cass.Change…8-115
8
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
Emuration Set Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers. Selection of emulation This machine can emulate the following printers: •
PCL6
•
KPDL
•
KPDL(Auto)
NOTE: When [KPDL (Auto)] is selected for the emulation mode, automatic switching between KPDL and PCL6 (substitute emulation) takes place based on the print data.
8-99
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the emulation.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Emulation Set.: a b 1 *PCL6 ********************* 2 KPDL 3 KPDL(Auto)
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Emuration Set.].
4
Press the OK key. Emuration Set. appears.
5
Press the or key to select the printer you want to emulate.
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
NOTE: If you select [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], the operation after selecting the emulation is different from others. If you select [KPDL], refer to page 8-101. If you select [KPDL(Auto)], refer to page 8-101.
8-100
Default Setting (System Menu) When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Emulation Set.: a b 1 PCL6 2 KPDL ********************* 3 KPDL(Auto)
KPDL Error Rpt: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
In Emulation Set, press the or key to select [KPDL].
2
Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
4
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
When KPDL(Auto) Is Selected for Emulation When you select [KPDL(Auto)], set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Emulation Set.: a b 1 PCL6 2 KPDL 3 KPDL(Auto) *********************
KPDL Error Rpt: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
In Emulation Set, press the or key to select [KPDL(Auto)].
2
Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
4
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
8-101
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Color Setting You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white. Use the procedure below to select the Color Setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Color Setting: a b ********************* 1 *Color 2 Black & White
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Color Setting].
4
Press the OK key. Color Setting appears.
5
Press the or key to select to select [Color] or [Black & White].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-102
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [EcoPrint].
4
Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
8
Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
On
A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source.
Off
A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting. The default setting is On.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-103
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Override A4/LTR: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Override A4/LTR].
4
Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Off
No duplex mode
Bind Long Edge
Longer edge bound
Bind Short Edge
Shorter edge bound
Finish
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-104
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Duplex: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Bind Long Edge 3 Bind Short Edge
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Duplex].
4
Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off], [Bind Long Edge] or [Bind Short Edge].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999. Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Copies].
8-105
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Copies: D b (1 - 999) *******1*copies
4
Press the OK key. Copies appears.
5
Press the or key or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
8-106
Default Setting (System Menu)
Orientation Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Portrait
Landscape
Printer
Printer
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Orientation: a b 1 *Portrait ********************* 2 Landscape
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
8 2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Orientation].
4
Press the OK key. Orientation appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Portrait] or [Landscape].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
8-107
Default Setting (System Menu)
Gloss Mode Gloss Mode, when set to High, increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by half. IMPORTANT: Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as the paper type setting. Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper. To reduce wrinkle, try using thicker paper. Use the procedure below to select Gloss mode.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Gloss Mode: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Gloss Mode].
4
Press the OK key. Gloss Mode appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
8-108
Default Setting (System Menu)
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation. Use the procedure below to select Wide A4.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Wide A4: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Wide A4].
4
Press the OK key. Wide A4 appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
FormFeed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds. Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-109
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
FormFeed TimeOut: D b (5 - 495) ******30*Sec.
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [FormFeed Timeout].
4
Press the OK key. FormFeed Timeout appears.
5
Press the or key to set the Form Feed Timeout. You can set the timeout delay in seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is LF Only. Item
Description
LF Only
Only line feed performed.
LF and CR
Line feed and character return performed.
Ignore LF
No line feed performed.
Use the procedure below to specify a LF action.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-110
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
LF Action: M b 1 *LF Only ********************* 2 LF and CR 3 Ignore LF
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [LF Action].
4
Press the OK key. LF Action appears.
5
Press the or key to select [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is CR Only. Item
Description
CR Only
Only character return performed.
LF and CR
Character return and line feed performed.
Ignore CR
No character return performed.
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
1
8-111
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
CR Action: a b 1 *CR Only ********************* 2 LF and CR 3 Ignore CR
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [CR Action].
4
Press the OK key.
5
Press the or key to select [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed. Use the procedure below to specify a Job Name.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Job Name].
8-112
Default Setting (System Menu)
Job Name.: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
4
Press the OK key. Job Name appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. When [On] is selected, a screen appears for you to set the job name to be used. When [Off] is selected, Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer screen.
Additional Info.:a b 1 *Job Name ********************* 2 Job No.+Job Name 3 Job Name+Job No.
7
Press the or key to select [Job Name], [Job No.+Job Name] or [Job Name+Job No.].
8 8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed. Use the procedure below to specify the User Name setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [User Name].
8-113
Default Setting (System Menu)
User Name: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
4
Press the OK key. User Name appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
Paper Feed Mode Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions. The default setting is Auto. Item
Description
Auto
Sets the paper feed direction automatically.
Fixed
Sets the paper feed direction the same as in the previous printing operation.
Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
Paper Feed Mode: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Fixed
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Paper Feed Mode].
4
Press the OK key. Paper Feed Mode appears.
8-114
Default Setting (System Menu)
5
Press the or key to select [Auto] or [Fixed].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
Auto Cass.Change Select the action that takes place when the cassette runs out of paper during printing. Selections are as follows. The default setting is [On]. Item
Description
Off
The printer displays Load Cassette # (# is a cassette number) or Load MP Tray, and stops printing. Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing. To print from the other paper cassette, press the or key to display Use alternative?, press the or key to select the desired paper source, and then press [GO].
On
If there is another cassette with the same size and type of paper, printing will automatically continue.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Cass.Change.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ]
Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Printer].
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Auto Cass.Change].
8-115
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Auto Cass.Change:a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
4
Press the OK key. Auto Cass.Change appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.
8-116
Default Setting (System Menu)
Printing Reports/Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges. You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white. Refer to Color Setting on 8-102
Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows. Menu map Outputs a menu map of this machine.
Menu Map Status Page Firmware Version
8
Status Page Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page Firmware Version
8-117
Default Setting (System Menu) Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine.
Optional Network Status You can view information on the installed network interface card or wireless interface card.
Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List / Optional Network Status.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. [ Exit ]
Report Print: a b 1 Menu Map ********************* 2 Status Page 3 Font List [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Report].
2
Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Report Print].
4
Press the OK key. The Report Print menu appears.
8-118
Default Setting (System Menu)
Print. Are you sure? z Status Page [
Yes
] [
5
Press the or key to select [Menu Map], [Status Page], [Font List] or [Opt NW Status].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. The screen shown is the one when Status Page is selected.
No
]
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu.
NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. is displayed and the output is canceled. Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose. Network Status Page Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Use the procedure below to print a Service Status / Network Status.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-119
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ]
Print. Are you sure? z Network Status [
Yes
] [
No
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Service Setting].
4
Press the OK key. Service Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Service Status] or [Network Status].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. The screen shown is the one when Network Status is selected.
]
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu.
NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. is displayed and the output is canceled.
8-120
Default Setting (System Menu)
Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Error Only. Item
Description
Off
No result report printed.
On
Result report automatically printed. Transmitted images can also be attached.
Error Only
Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached.
Use the procedure below to send a Result Report.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. [ Exit ]
Result Rpt Set.: a b 1 Send Result ********************* 2 FAX RX Result 3 JobFinish Notice [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Report].
2
Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Result Rpt Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The Result Rpt Set. menu appears.
8-121
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Send Result: a b 1 E-mail/Folder ********************* 2 FAX 3 CancelBeforeSend [ Exit ]
a b E-mail/Folder: 1 Off 2 On 3 *Error Only *********************
5
Press the U or V key to select [Send Result]. The Send Result menu appears.
6
Press the U or V key to select [E-mail/Folder], [FAX], [CancelBeforeSend]] or [Dest. Info.]. Selected menu appears.
NOTE: Selecting [CancelBeforeSend] can be specified whether the machine prints the report when canceling the operation before sending. When selecting [Off] in both E-mail/Folder and FAX menu, [CancelBeforeSend] is not displayed.
7
Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On] or [Error Only]. When selecting [FAX], press the U or V key to select [Off], [On], [Error Only] or [Specify Each Job]. When [On], [Error Only], or [Specify Each Job] is selected and the OK key is pressed, [Off], [Partial Image], or [Full Image] can be selected. When selecting [CancelBeforeSend], press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. When selecting [Dest. Info.], press the U or V key to select [Dest. or Name] or [Dest. and Name].
8
Press the OK key. A Result Report is sent. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send Result menu.
8-122
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. •
Copy Denst. Adj. …8-123
•
Send/Box Density …8-124
•
Backgrnd Density …8-125
•
AutoColorCorrect …8-126
•
ColorCalibration …8-126
•
Color Regist. …8-127
•
Correct. Bk Line …8-134
•
LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting) …8-135
•
Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting) …8-136
•
Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) …8-137
•
MC (Main charger output setting) …8-138
•
Mem.Diagnostics …8-139
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
Copy Denst. Adj. Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Copy Denst. Adj.].
8-123
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Copy Denst. Adj.: a b 3 -1 4 * 0 Normal ********************* 5 +1
4
Press the OK key. Copy Denst. Adj. appears.
5
Press the or key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Send/Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Send/Box Density: a b 3 -1 4 * 0 Normal ********************* 5 +1
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Send/Box Density].
4
Press the OK key. Send/Box Density appears.
5
Press the or key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
8-124
Default Setting (System Menu)
Backgrnd Density Darkens or lightens the overall background density. Copy mode and send/document box mode can each be adjusted to one of seven levels. Use the procedure below to specify the setting for Background Density.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Backgrnd Density:a b 1 Copy(Auto) ********************* 2 Send/Box(Auto) [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Backgrnd Density].
4
Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Copy(Auto)] or [Send/Box(Auto)].
6
Press the OK key. This displays the density selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Copy(Auto)] is selected.
7
Press the or key to select the density from [3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
]
Copy(Auto): a b 3 -1 4 * 0 Normal ********************* 5 +1
8-125
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
AutoColorCorrect This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white. Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
AutoColorCorrect: a b ********************* 1 5 2 4 3 3
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [AutoColorCorrect].
4
Press the OK key. AutoColorCorrect appears.
5
Press the or key to select a value from [5] to [1].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
ColorCalibration This machine contains a calibration function that automatically makes adjustments to compensate for changes that occur over time due to variations in the ambient temperature and humidity. So that the highest quality color printing can be maintained, this color calibration operation is carried out automatically each time the power to the machine is turned on. If color tone does not improve or color drift does not improve after executing this color adjustment, perform color print position correction on page 8-127.
8-126
Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set the Color Calibration.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Start the color calibration. Are you sure? [
Yes
] [
No
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [ColorCalibration].
4
Press the OK key. ColorCalibration appears.
8 ]
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute Color Calibration.
6
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Color Regist. When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed settings.
NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform color calibration (see page 8-126). If color drift remains, perform color registration. By performing color registration without performing color calibration, the color drift will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
8-127
Default Setting (System Menu) Normal Registration Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Color Regist.: a b 1 Normal ********************* 2 Detail [
Exit
Print. Are you sure? w Registration chart. Yes
] [
No
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Color Regist.].
4
Press the OK key. Color Regist. appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Normal].
6
Press the OK key. The normal registration appears. Press the or key to select [Print Chart].
7
Press the OK key. The chart print confirmation menu appears.
]
Normal: a b 1 Print Chart ********************* 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan
[
1
]
8-128
Default Setting (System Menu)
8
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart printing. After the charts are printed, you will return to the standard menu of color print position correction. Three charts, H-L (left), V (center), and H-R (right) are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the colors M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow).
Color Registration Correction Chart
MH-L I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
MV I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9
MH-R I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
8 CH-L I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
YH-L I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
CV I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9
H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9
H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
CH-R I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
YV
8-129
YH-R I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Normal: a b 1 Print Chart ********************* 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan
9
Press the or key to select [Adjust Magenta]. Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu appears.
10 In the color registration correction chart printed in Print Registration Chart above, note the numbers of the sections in the magenta H and V charts where the lines most closely coincide as a single straight line. In the left example, the value would be B.
Adjust Magenta: a b (I - A, 0 - 9) 0 V: 0 H-L:***
11 Press or key to change items (H-L, V and HR). Press or key to enter the value read from the chart and press [OK]. Magenta correction is performed. After a brief interval you will return to the standard menu of color print position correction.
H-R: 0
Press key to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press . By pressing , the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, press . You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow. Detailed Settings Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-130
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Color Regist.: a b 1 Normal ********************* 2 Detail [
Exit
Print. Are you sure? w Registration chart. Yes
] [
No
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Color Regist.].
4
Press the OK key. Color Regist. appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Detail].
6
Press the OK key. The detail registration appears. Press the or key to select [Print Chart].
]
Detail: a b 1 Print Chart ********************* 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan
[
2
8 7
Press the OK key. The chart print confirmation menu appears.
8
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart printing. After the charts are printed, you will return to the detail menu of color print position correction.
]
Two charts, H-1 to H-5V (upper) and V-3 (lower) are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the colors M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow).
8-131
Default Setting (System Menu)
Detail: a b 1 Print Chart ********************* 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan
9
8-132
Press the or key to select [Adjust Magenta]. Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu appears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
10 In the color registration correction chart printed in Print Registration Chart above, note the numbers of the sections in the magenta H and V charts where the lines most closely coincide as a single straight line. In the left example, the value would be B.
Adjust Magenta: a b (I - A, 0 - 9) H-1:***H-2: 0 H-3: 0 0 0 0 V-3: 0 H-4:***H-5:
11 Press or key to change items (H-1 to H-5, V3). Press or key to enter the value read from the chart and press [OK]. Magenta correction is performed. After a brief interval you will return to the detail menu of color print position correction. Press key to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press . By pressing , the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, press . You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow.
8-133
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Correct. Bk Line Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the document processor is used.
K
Paper feed direction
The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Off
No correction performed.
On(Low)
Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off.
On(High)
Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On (Low). The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low).
NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to keep the default ([Off]). Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-134
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Correct. Bk Line: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On(Low) 3 On(High)
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Correct. Bk Line].
4
Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting) This sets the cleaning mode for the laser scanner. When the printing quality declines, cleaning the laser scanner can restore the printing quality. Use the procedure below to set the laser scanner cleaning mode setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Service Setting].
8-135
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ]
Start the laser scanner cleaning. Are you sure? [
Yes
] [
No
4
Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [LaserScanner Cln].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu.
]
Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting) This sets the refresh mode for the drum. When the printing quality declines, refreshing the drum can restore the printing quality. Use the procedure below to set the drum refresh mode setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Service Setting].
8-136
Default Setting (System Menu)
Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ]
Start the drum refresh. Are you sure? [
Yes
] [
No
4
Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Drum Refresh].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu.
]
8
Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) This sets the altitude adjustment mode. If you are using the machine at an altitude of 1500 m or higher and print quality has deteriorated, the Altitude Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print quality. Use the procedure below to set the altitude adjustment setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Service Setting].
8-137
Default Setting (System Menu)
Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ]
Altitude Adj.: a b 1 *Normal ********************* 2 High 1 3 High 2
4
Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Altitude Adj.].
6
Press the OK key. Altitude Adj. appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Normal], [High 1] or [High 2].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu.
MC (Main charger output setting) This sets the output of the main charger. When print quality has deteriorated, the output of the main charger can be changed to restore print quality.
NOTE: This menu only appears when the Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) on page 8-137 is set to [Normal]. Use the procedure below to set the main charger output setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Service Setting].
8-138
Default Setting (System Menu)
Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ]
MC: a b 1 1 2 2 3 *3 *********************
4
Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [MC].
6
Press the OK key. MC appears.
7
Press the or key to select [1] to [5].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu.
8
Mem.Diagnostics Perform this function to check the machine memory. Use the procedure below to set the Memory Diagnostics mode setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ]
Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Backgrnd Density [ Exit ]
Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Service Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu appears.
8-139
Default Setting (System Menu)
Perform this function to check the machine memory. [ Start
5
Press the or key to select [Mem.Diagnostics].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7
Press [Start] (the Left Select key). Turn the main power switch off and on to run this function. is displayed. Turn the main power switch off and on.
] [ Cancel ]
8-140
Default Setting (System Menu)
Date/Timer Date/Timer settings include: •
Date/Time …8-141
•
Date Format …8-143
•
Time Zone …8-144
•
Summer Time …8-145
•
Auto Panel Reset …8-146
•
Low Power Timer …8-149
•
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) …8-150
•
Sleep Timer …8-152
•
Auto Error Clear …8-153
•
Unusable Time …8-156
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
8
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup. Use the procedure below to set the date and time.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
8-141
Default Setting (System Menu)
3
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in.
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
Press the or key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key.
]
Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ]
Date/Time: a b Year Month Day *2009* 01 01 (Time Zone:Tokyo )
4
The Date Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Date/Time].
6
Press the OK key. The screen to enter the date of Date/Time appears.
7
Set the date. Press the or key to move to the item (Year / Month / Day) you want to enter. Press the or key to set each item.
Date/Time: a b Hour Min. Second ****11 : 45: 50 (Time Zone:Tokyo )
8
Press the OK key. The screen to enter the time of Date/Time appears.
9
Set the time. Press the or key to move to the item (Hour / Min. / Second) you want to enter. Press the or key to set each item.
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
8-142
Default Setting (System Menu)
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application is running, the If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time, press [Yes] (the Left Select key).
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Use the procedure below to select the date format.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
Press the or key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key.
]
Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ]
4
The Date Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Date Format].
8-143
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Date Format: a b 1 *Month/Day/Year ********************* 2 Day/Month/Year 3 Year/Month/Day
6
Press the OK key. Date Format appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Month/Day/Year], [Day/Month/Year] or [Year/Month/Day].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT. Use the procedure below to set the time difference.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu
] [ Login
]
Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ]
4
8-144
The Date Settings menu appears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
Time Zone: a b 1 -12:00 Internati ********************* 2 -11:00 UTC-11 3 -10:00 Hawaii
5
Press the or key to select [Time Zone].
6
Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.
7
Press the or key to select your location.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.
Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date. Use the procedure below to set Summer Time.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu
] [ Login
]
8-145
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Date Setting: a b 2 Date Format ********************* 3 Time Zone 4 Summer Time [ Exit ]
Summer Time: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
4
The Date Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Summer Time].
6
Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 8-30 for the default settings. Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting. The default setting is On.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key.
8-146
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
Auto Panel Reset: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Auto Panel Reset].
6
Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears.
8 7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 90 seconds.
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear. Use the procedure below to set the reset time.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-147
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
PanelReset Timer:D b (5 - 495) ******90*sec.
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Panel Reset Timer].
6
Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears.
7
Press the or key to set the Panel Reset Timer. Set the amount of time before resetting the message display on the panel in seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
8-148
Default Setting (System Menu) Low Power Timer The time until the machine enters low power mode can be set. The range that can be set is as follows. Value For Europe 30 ppm model: 1 to 60 minutes (1minute increments) 35 ppm model: 1 to 120 minutes (1minute increments) Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes (1minute increments) Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Timer. The default setting is 1 minute.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Low Power Timer].
8-149
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Low Power Timer: M b (1 - 240) *******1*min.
6
Press the OK key. Low Power Timer appears.
7
Press the or key to set the Low Power Timer. Set the amount of time before entering the Low Power state in minutes. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) Detailed settings can be selected for sleep mode. Detailed settings for sleep mode are called Energy Saver mode. When a function is set in Energy Saver mode and the function sends data to the machine, the machine does not execute the function. When Quick Recovery is specified, the machine wakes from sleep mode when any kind of data is received. Example: When print data is sent from a PC connected by Network Quick Recovery Energy Saver
When the machine receives print data, it wakes from sleep mode and starts printing. The machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print data and printing does not take place.
Use the procedure below to specify the Sleep Level.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key.
8-150
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
Sleep level: a b 1 Quick Recovery ********************* 2 Energy Saver
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Sleep Level].
6
Press the OK key. Sleep Level appears.
8
Energy Saver: a b 1 Network ********************* 2 Card Reader 3 FAX
Network: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
7
Press the or key to select [Quick Recovery] or [Energy Saver].
8
Select [Quick Recovery] and press the OK key. Completed. appears and you return to the timer settings menu. Select [Energy Saver] and press the OK key. The detailed settings screen of Energy Saver mode appears.
9
Press the or key to select the desired function for energy saver.
10 Press the OK key. The setting screen of each item appears.
11 Press the or key to select [Off] or [On] for the energy saver. When [On] is set for a function and that function sends data to the machine when the machine is in Energy Saver mode, the machine will not execute the function.
8-151
Default Setting (System Menu)
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Energy Saver mode. Sleep Timer Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Value For Europe 1 to 60 minutes (1minute increments) Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes (1minute increments) Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 1 minute.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Sleep Timer].
8-152
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sleep Timer: D b (1 - 240) ******15*min.
6
Press the OK key. Sleep Timer appears.
7
Press the or key or the numeric keys to set the Sleep Timer. Set the amount of time before entering the sleep state in minutes.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. The following errors are automatically cleared. Cannot duplex print on this paper.
8
Send error. Cannot connect to Authentication Server. Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan. Job not stored. Press [OK]. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled. Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Job is canceled. Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely. Maximum Number of scanned pages. Job is canceled. Print overrun. KPDL error. USB memory error. Job is canceled. No multi copies. Press [OK]. Auto Error Clear ON/OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-153
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
Auto Err. Clear: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Auto Err. Clear].
6
Press the OK key. Auto Err. Clear appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
8-154
Default Setting (System Menu) Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 30 seconds. If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed.
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear. Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
8 3
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key.
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Err. Clear Timer].
8-155
Default Setting (System Menu)
Err. Clear Timer: * b (5 - 495) ******30*sec.
6
Press the OK key. Err. Clear Timer appears.
7
Press the or key to set the Error Clear Timer. Set the amount of time before clearing errors in seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Common Settings].
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key.
Unusable Time You can specify the prohibition period to use. Use the procedure below to set the Unusable Time.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ]
Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ]
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
]
Timer Setting: a b 1 Auto Panel Reset ********************* 2 PanelReset Timer 3 Low Power Timer [ Exit ]
4
8-156
The Timer Settings menu appears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
Unusable Time: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* [
Exit
5
Press the or key to select [Unusable Time].
6
Press the OK key. Unusable Time appears.
7
Press the or key to select [On].
8
Press the OK key. Start Time appears.
9
Press the or key to set the Start Time.
]
Start Time: a b Hour Min. ***11*: 45 (Current Time 11:45)
End Time: a b Hour Min. ***07*: 00 (Current Time 11:45)
10 Press the OK key. End Time appears.
11 Press the or keyto set the End Time. Unlock Code: a b (0000 - 9999) ******0000***
12 Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears.
13 Press the or key or numeric keys to set the unlock code.
14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
8-157
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission.
Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 200 individual addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No..
NOTE: •
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Edit Destination:a b 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Edit Destination].
2
Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Address Book].
4
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears.
5
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
]
Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail Edit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Address 4 Search(Name)
8-158
Default Setting (System Menu)
Add Address: a b 1 Contact ********************* 2 Group
Detail: Contact Name Sally [
C b 1/6
6
Press the or key to select [Add Address].
7
Press the OK key. Add Address appears.
8
Press the or key to select [Contact].
9
Press the OK key. This displays the screen for editing destinations.
NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has Edit
]
already been registered, the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book.
10 Enter each item and then press the OK key. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item. Entering Contact Name
Detail: Contact Name Sally [
Contact Name: Sally* S [
C b 1/6
Edit
Press the or key to select [Contact Name].
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears.
3
Enter the contact name.
]
A b
ABC Text
1
]
If creating a new contact name, the address number allocated to the destination is already entered.
4
8-159
Press the OK key. The contact name is registered.
8
Default Setting (System Menu) Entering E-mail Address
Detail: C b p E-mail Address: 3/6 t_maury@###########.N [
Edit
Address Entry: *
[
Press the or key to display E-mail Address.
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears.
3
Enter the e-mail address.
]
B b
ABC Text
1
]
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41.
4
Press the OK key. The e-mail address is registered.
Entering Folder (SMB/FTP) Address Folder (SMB) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. Item
Description
Max. No. of Characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of the sending computer
64 chars
Path
Share name For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: "share name\folder name in shared folder"
128 chars
Login User Name
User name for folder access For example, abcdnet\james.smith
64 chars
Login Password
Password for folder access
64 chars
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (445), use the "Host name: port number" format. (E.g. SMBhostname: 140)
8-160
Default Setting (System Menu) Folder (FTP) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. Item
Description
Max. No. of Characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of the sending computer
64 chars
Path
Path for the file to be stored For example, "User\ScanData". If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
128 chars
Login User Name
User name for folder access
64 chars
Login Password
Password for folder access
64 chars
Encryption
If secure communication is On, encryption method can be selected from Auto, DES, 3DES and AES.
-
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Hostname: port number" format. (E.g. FTPhostname: 140)
Detail: Folder(SMB): Ntid7004 [
Edit
Host Name(SMB): Osaka SD*
[
C b 4/6
Press the or key to display Folder(SMB) or Folder(FTP).
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears.
3
Enter the host name.
]
A b
ABC Text
1
]
or
Host Name(FTP): Osaka SD*
A b
ABC [ Text
]
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41. Enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ].
8-161
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
A b
Path: SD3\report*
ABC [ Text
Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO*
[
Yes
] [
No
Enter the path name.
6
Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.
7
Enter the Login User Name.
8
Press the OK key. Login Password appears.
9
Enter the Login Password.
]
Check the connection. Are you sure?
[
5
]
A b
ABC Text
Press the OK key. Path appears.
]
Login User Name: A b Maury* S ABC [ Text
4
10 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
] NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-77) is set to [On], screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear. Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens.
8-162
Default Setting (System Menu)
Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@###########N 0667640000********* 0667741234 [ Exit ]
11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a connection with the entered destination.
If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the folder (SMB/FTP) address is registered. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 2 reappears. Check and reenter the destination. Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for individuals and 50 numbers for groups.
Detail: Address Number: 053 [
C b 7/7
Edit
1
Press the or key to display Address Number.
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears.
3
Press the or key or the numeric keys to enter the address number.
4
Press the OK key. The address number is registered.
]
Address Number: D b (001 - 250) *****053*
NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already registered, the screen will display This address number is already registered. and return to the screen of step 2.
8-163
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be included in the group must be added first.Up to 100 destinations can be added as the addresses. Among them, 5 destinations can be assigned for a FTP or SMB address. The available addresses will then be 95 in total for email and/or fax addresses. Use the procedure below to register a group.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Edit Destination:a b 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Edit Destination].
2
Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Address Book].
4
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears.
5
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Add Address].
]
Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add Address *********************
8-164
Default Setting (System Menu)
Add Address: a b 1 Contact 2 Group *********************
Detail: Group Name: GUI Section [
C b 1/4
7
Press the OK key. Add Address appears.
8
Press the or key to select [Group].
9
Press the OK key. This displays the screen for editing groups.
NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already Edit
]
been registered, the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book.
10 Enter each item and then press the OK key. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item. Entering Group Name
Detail: Group Name: GUI Section [
Group Name: GUI* S [
C b 1/4
Edit
Press the or key to display Group Name.
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears.
3
Enter the group name.
]
A b
ABC Text
1
]
If creating a new group name, the address number allocated to the destination is already entered.
4
8-165
Press the OK key. The group name is registered.
8
Default Setting (System Menu) Entering Group Member
Detail: Group Member: 30 [
C b 2/4
Edit
1
Press the or key to display Group Member.
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays the list of destinations registered to the group.
3
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group editing menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Add Member].
5
Press the OK key. This displays the list of destinations registered in the Address Book.
]
Group Member: a b p Sally ********************* Morgan G Morgan [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail 2 Delete 3 Add Member *********************
Contacts: a b l Fiala ********************* l Maury l Morgan [ Menu ]
l Sally: a b 0667643277 p sally@###########.N Ntid7004 [ Menu ]
NOTE: If 100 members have already been registered in the group, the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the Group Member.
6
Press the or key to select the destination you want to add to the group.
7
Press the OK key. This displays the sending address registered to the selected destination.
8
Press the or key to select the sending address.
9
Press the OK key.
10 Press the Back key to retuen to the Detail.
8-166
Default Setting (System Menu)
11 Use the or key to check if the group was set correctly.
12 Press the OK key. The group is added to the Address Book.
NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group, the screen will display This address is already registered. and return to the screen of step 7. Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below.
Group Member: a b p Sally ********************* Morgan Morgan [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add Member
Delete. Are you sure? z p Sally [
Yes
] [
No
1
While Group Member is displayed, press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays the list of destinations registered to the group.
2
Press the or key to select the destination you want to delete.
3
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group editing menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Delete].
5
Press the OK key. A confirmation message appears.
6
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Group Member.
]
Entering Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for individuals and 50 numbers for groups.
8-167
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Detail: Address Number: 019 [
C b 4/4
Edit
1
Press the or key to display Address Number.
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears.
3
Press the or key or the numeric keys to enter the address number.
4
Press the OK key. The address number is registered.
]
Address Number: D b (001 - 250) *****053*
NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already registered, the screen will display This address number is already registered. and return to the screen of step 2.
Editing a Destination Edit/delete the destinations (individuals) you added to the Address Book. Use the procedure below to edit a destination.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ]
Edit Destination:a b 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [
Exit
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [Edit Destination].
2
Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Address Book].
]
8-168
Default Setting (System Menu)
Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail Rdit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Address 4 Search(Name)
A b 1/7
Detail: Contact name Sally [
Edit
4
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select the destination you want to edit.
6
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Detail/Edit].
8
Press the OK key. This displays the screen for editing the selected destination. The screen shown is the one when an individual's destination is selected.
]
9
Edit items as necessary. For how to edit each item, refer to Adding an Individual Destination on page 8-158 and Adding a Group on page 8-164.
10 After completing editing, press the OK key. A
Overwrite. Are you sure? z p Sally [
Yes
] [
confirmation screen appears.
No
]
11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen.
8-169
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Adding a Destination on One-touch Key This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them. The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below: No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.12
No.13
No.14
No.15
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.16
No.17
No.18
No.19
No.9
No.10
No.11
No.20
No.21
No.22
SHIFT
NOTE: Refer to One-Touch Key on page 3-3 for how to use them. Registering new destination Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch key.
Select Key No.: a b 1 No. 1 ********************* 2 No. 12 [
Exit
1
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is pressed and held.
]
Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
In the basic screen, press the one-touch key to which you want to register the destination and hold it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.
2
Press the or key to select the key number to which you want to register the destination.
3
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears.
4
Press the or key to select the destination you want to register.
NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book, refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-42.
5
8-170
Press the OK key. The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
Default Setting (System Menu) Editing One-touch Key Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key. Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key.
Select Key No.: a b 1 No. 1 ********************* 2 No. 12 [
Exit
1
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is pressed and held.
]
Key Edit: a b 1 Edit ********************* 2 Detail 3 Delete [ Exit ]
In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where you want to edit the destination and hold it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.
2
Press the or key to select the key number where you want to edit the destination.
3
Press the OK key. The Key Edit appears.
NOTE: If nothing is stored in a one-touch key, the key edit screen will not appear; the address book screen will appear instead. Go to step 6.
8 4
Press the or key to select [Edit].
NOTE: If you select [Delete] here and press the OK key, you can delete the registration of the destination. If you press [Yes] (the Left Select key) in the screen that appears, Completed. is displayed and the registration of the destination is deleted.
Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ]
5
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears.
6
Press the or key to select the destination you want to newly register.
NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book, refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-42.
8-171
Default Setting (System Menu)
Overwrite. Are you sure? z No. 1 [
Yes
] [
No
7
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
8
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key, overwriting the previous one. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.
]
8-172
Default Setting (System Menu)
Restarting the System Restart the machine without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.) Use the procedure below to restart the system.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 5 Security Level 6 Restart ********************* 7 Op Functions [ Exit ]
Restart. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
No
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Restart].
4
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is restarted.
]
If you press [No] (the Right Select key), the machine does not restart and the screen returns to the System menu.
8-173
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Setup The following network settings are available. • • • • • • • •
LAN Interface Setup …8-174 TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-175 TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-175 Bonjour Settings …8-177 WSD Scan Setup …8-178 WSD Print Setup …8-179 Protocol Detail …8-181 Restart Network …8-184
NOTE: After all network related settings have been done, turn the machine OFF and ON again. This is mandatory to make the settings effective!
LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto. Use the procedure below to select the interface.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3 4
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
8-174
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
LAN Interface: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 10Base-Half 3 10Base-Full
5
Press the or key to select [LAN Interface].
6
Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears.
7
Press the or key to select the desired LAN interface. The available LAN interfaces are as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Half 100Base-Full 1000Base-T
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-15 about the procedures.
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
8-175
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ]
IPv6 Setting: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On [
Exit
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [IPv6 Setting].
8
Press the OK key. IPv6 Setting appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
]
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.
8-176
Default Setting (System Menu)
Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP].
8-177
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
TCP/IP: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
8
Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.
10 Press the or key to select [Bonjour]. Bonjour: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
11 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.
12 Press the or key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.
WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-SCAN setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
8-178
Default Setting (System Menu)
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
WSD-SCAN: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [WSD-SCAN].
6
Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu appears.
8 7
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu.
WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-PRINT setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8-179
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
WSD-PRINT: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [WSD-PRINT].
6
Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu.
8-180
Default Setting (System Menu)
Protocol Detail Make other network related settings. Item
Description
Default Setting
Restarting the System*
NetBEUI
Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI.
On
SNMPv3
Set SNMPv3.
Off
FTP (Server)
Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.
On
FTP (Client)
Select whether or not to send documents using FTP, and the number of the port to be used.
On Port number: 21
×
SMB
Select whether or not to send documents using SMB, and the number of the port to be used.
On Port number: 139
SNMP
Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.
On
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.
Off
×
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3.
Off
×
Raw Port
Select whether or not to communicate using Raw Port.
On
LPD
Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol.
On
IPP
Select whether or not to use IPP, and the number of the port to be used.
Off Port number: 631
IPP over SSL
Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-185.
On
HTTP
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.
On
8-181
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Item
Description
Default Setting
Restarting the System*
HTTPS
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-185.
On
LDAP
Select whether or not to use LDAP.
Off
×
ThinPrint
Select whether or not to use ThinPrint.
On
ThinPrintOverSSL
Select whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-185.
On
*
: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. ×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
Use the procedure below.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
8-182
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
TCP/IP Settings: a b 3 IPv6 Setting 4 Bonjour 5 Protocol Detail ********************* [ Exit ]
Protocol Detail: a b 1 NetBEUI ********************* 2 SNMPv3 3 FTP(Server)
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Protocol Detail].
8
Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu appears.
8 9
FTP(Client):
a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
Press the or key to select the item for which you want to make settings.
10 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen for the item selected in step 9. The screen shown is the one when [FTP(Client)] is selected.
11 Press the or key to select [On] or [Off]. Port Number:
If you select [On] for each of [FTP(Client)] and [IPP] and press the OK key, a port number entry screen appears.
D b
(1 - 65535) *******21*
Press the or key or the numeric keys to set the port number.
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu.
8-183
Default Setting (System Menu)
Restart Network After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to make the settings effective.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
Restart. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
No
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Restart Network].
6
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7
Press [Yes]. (the Left Select key). The message Restarting... appears and the network is restarted.
]
Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the Network Settings menu without restarting the network.
8-184
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data. The following network security settings are available. •
SSL Setting …8-185
•
SNMPv3 Setting …8-193
•
IPSec Setting …8-194
SSL Setting This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. You can use SSL Setup to select whether or not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings. SSL Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
8-185
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Setting: a b 5 Secure Protocol ********************* 6 Host Name 7 LAN Interface [ Exit ]
Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL ********************* 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security [ Exit ]
SSL: a b 1 Off 2 *On *********************
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Secure Protocol].
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7
Press the or key to select [SSL].
8
Press the OK key. SSL appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. IPP Security Specify the protocol to be used for IPP. The default setting is IPP/IPP over SSL. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
8-186
Default Setting (System Menu)
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 5 Secure Protocol ********************* 6 Host Name 7 LAN Interface [ Exit ]
Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL 2 IPP Security ********************* 3 HTTP Security [ Exit ]
IPP Security: a b 1 *IPP/IPP over SSL ********************* 2 IPPoverSSL only
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Secure Protocol].
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
8 7
Press the or key to select [IPP Security].
8
Press the OK key. IPP Security appears.
9
Press the or key to select [IPP/IPP over SSL] or [IPPoverSSL only].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. HTTP Security Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP. The default setting is HTTPS only. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
8-187
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 5 Secure Protocol ********************* 6 Host Name 7 LAN Interface [ Exit ]
Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security ********************* [ Exit ]
HTTP Security: a b 1 HTTP/HTTPS 2 *HTTPS only *********************
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Secure Protocol].
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7
Press the or key to select [HTTP Security].
8
Press the OK key. HTTP Security appears.
8-188
Default Setting (System Menu)
9
Press the or key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or [HTTPS only].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. LDAP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. The default setting is Off. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Off
Do not use security employed by the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable LDAP security, the LDAP port may have to be changed according to the server settings. Typically, 636* for SSL/TLS is well-known LDAP port.
STARTTLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 389* for STARTTLS is well-known LDAP port.
* You can change the port number using Embedded Web Server RX. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
8-189
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Setting: a b 5 Secure Protocol ********************* 6 Host Name 7 LAN Interface [ Exit ]
Secure Protocol: a b 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security 4 LDAP Security ********************* [ Exit ]
LDAP Security: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 SSL/TLS 3 STARTTLS
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Secure Protocol].
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7
Press the or key to select [LDAP Security].
8
Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears.
9
Press the or key to select [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. SMTP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP server. The default setting is Off. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Off
Do not use security employed by the SMTP server.
SSL/TLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable SMTP security, the SMTP port may have to be changed according to the server settings. Typically, 465* for SSL/TLS is well-known SMTP port.
STARTTLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 25* or 587* for STARTTLS is well-known SMTP port.
* You can change the port number using Embedded Web Server RX. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
8-190
Default Setting (System Menu)
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
Secure Protocol: a b 3 HTTP Security 4 LDAP Security 5 SMTP Security ********************* [ Exit ]
SMTP Security: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 SSL/TLS 3 STARTTLS
2
The System/Network menu appears.
8 3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Secure Protocol].
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7
Press the or key to select [SMTP Security].
8
Press the OK key. SMTP Security appears.
8-191
Default Setting (System Menu)
9
Press the or key to select [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. POP3 Security 1 (2, 3) Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3 server. The default setting is Off. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Off
Do not use security employed by the POP3 server.
SSL/TLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable POP3 security, the POP3 port may have to be changed according to the server settings. Typically, 995* for SSL/TLS is well-known POP3 port.
STARTTLS
Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 110* for STARTTLS is well-known POP3 port.
* You can change the port number using Embedded Web Server RX. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
8-192
Default Setting (System Menu)
Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT [ Exit ]
Secure Protocol: a b 4 LDAP Security 5 SMTP Security 6 POP3 Security 1 ********************* [ Exit ]
POP3 Security 1: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 SSL/TLS 3 STARTTLS
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Secure Protocol].
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7
Press the or key to select [POP3 Security 1], [POP3 Security 2] or [POP3 Security 3].
8
Press the OK key. POP3 Security appears.
8
9
Press the or key to select [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.
SNMPv3 Setting Sets up SNMPv3. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below. Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8-181 about the procedures.
8-193
Default Setting (System Menu)
IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is Off and that of Rule Setting is also Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Network Setting: a b 2 WSD-SCAN 3 WSD-PRINT 4 IPSec ********************* [ Exit ]
IPSec: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Network Setting].
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [IPSec].
6
Press the OK key. IPSec appears.
8-194
Default Setting (System Menu)
7
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off]. If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule Setting appears. Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
Rule Setting: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu.
8
8-195
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional Network This selects the settings for the optional network interface kit (IB-50) or wireless network interface kit (IB-51).
NOTE: This is only displayed when a network interface kit (IB-50) or wireless network interface kit (IB-51) is installed as an option. Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting. After all network related settings have been done, restart the network. Refer to Restart Network on page 8-206. This is mandatory to make the settings effective! When Embedded Web Server RX is used, network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC. For more information, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
TCP/IP Settings This selects the TCP/IP settings. The options available in the TCP/IP Settings are as follows: •
TCP/IP …8-197
•
IPv4 Setting …8-197
•
IPv6 Setting …8-197
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
8-196
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
7
Press the or key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
8
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu screen appears.
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] TCP/IP This specified whether TCP/IP is used.
The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup on page 8-175.
IPv4 Setting This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv4). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup on page 8-175. IPv6 Setting This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv6). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup on page 8-175.
8-197
8
Default Setting (System Menu) Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Bonjour].
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
8-198
Default Setting (System Menu)
Bonjour: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
8
Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu.
IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
8-199
8
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
7
Press the or key to select [IPSec].
8
Press the OK key. The IPSec screen appears.
9
Press the or key to select [Off] or [On].
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
IPSec: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu. NetWare Setup Make this setting when you use NetWare. The default settings is "Off". Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
8-200
Default Setting (System Menu)
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
NetWare: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
8 7
Press the or key to select [NetWare].
8
Press the OK key. NetWare appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu.
8-201
Default Setting (System Menu) AppleTalk Setup Make this setting when you use AppleTalk. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
3
The System/Network menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
5
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Basic].
7
Press the or key to select [AppleTalk].
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
[
1
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
8-202
Default Setting (System Menu)
AppleTalk: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
8
Press the OK key. AppleTalk appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu. LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto. Use the procedure below to select the interface.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8 A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
]
8-203
Default Setting (System Menu)
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
LAN Interface: a b 1 Auto ********************* 2 10Base-Half 3 10Base-Full [ Exit ]
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
7
Press the or key to select [LAN Interface].
8
Press the OK key. The LAN Interface screen appears.
9
Press the or key to select the desired [LAN Interface]. The available LAN Interface are as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Half 100Base-Full 1000Base-T
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu. MAC Address Filter Select whether to use MAC Address Filter. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the MAC Address Filter setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
8-204
Default Setting (System Menu)
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
MACAddressFilter:a b 1 Off ********************* 2 *On
8 7
Press the or key to select [MAC Address Filter].
8
Press the OK key. The MAC Address Filter screen appears.
9
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu.
8-205
Default Setting (System Menu)
Restart Network After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to make the settings effective.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
Optional Network:a b 1 Basic *********************
[
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Optional Network].
4
Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Basic].
6
Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Restart Network].
]
Basic: a b 1 Host Name ********************* 2 TCP/IP Settings 3 Bonjour [ Exit ]
8-206
Default Setting (System Menu)
8
Restart. Are you sure?
[
Yes
] [
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes]. (the Left Select key). The message Restarting... appears and the network is restarted.
No
Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the Basic menu without restarting the network.
]
8
8-207
Default Setting (System Menu)
NW InterfaceSend The client function such as the network authentication and the reference of user information via LDAP operates only by the selected interface. This function is mainly used for the network system administrator. For more information about each function, refer to Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
NW InterfaceSend:a b 1 *Standard ********************* 2 Option NIC [
Exit
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [NW InterfaceSend].
4
Press the OK key. The NW InterfaceSend screen appears.
5
Press the or key to select the desired [NIC].
]
6
8-208
Standard:
standard network interface
Option NIC:
optional network interface kit
Press the OK key. The NIC is set and the Basic menu reappears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. The following interface block settings are available: •
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)
•
USB Device (USB interface setting)
•
USB Storage (USB storage setting)
•
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)
USB Host (USB memory slot setting) This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
8 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host ********************* 2 USB Device 3 USB Storage [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [I/F Block Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [USB Host].
8-209
Default Setting (System Menu)
USB Host: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block
6
Press the OK key. USB Host appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Unblock] or [Block].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu.
USB Device (USB interface setting) This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host ********************* 2 USB Device 3 USB Storage [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [I/F Block Set.].
4
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears.
8-210
Default Setting (System Menu)
USB Device: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block
5
Press the or key to select [USB Device].
6
Press the OK key. USB Device appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Unblock] or [Block].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu.
USB Storage (USB storage setting) This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Storage). The default setting is Unblock.
NOTE: This function is available when USB Host is set to Unblock.
8
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network], and press the OK key.
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [I/F Block Set.].
8-211
Default Setting (System Menu)
I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host ********************* 2 USB Device 3 USB Storage [ Exit ]
USB Storage: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block
4
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [USB Storage].
6
Press the OK key. USB Storage appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Unblock] or [Block].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu.
8-212
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) This locks and protects the optional interface slot. The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System/Network].
]
System/Network: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 Optional Network 3 NW InterfaceSend [ Exit ]
I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host ********************* 2 USB Device 3 USB Storage [ Exit ]
2
The System/Network menu appears.
8 3 4
Press the or key to select [I/F Block Set.].
5
Press the or key to select [Option I/F 1] or [Option I/F 2].
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears.
For P-C2660 MFP, select [Option I/F].
Option I/F 1: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block
6
Press the OK key. Option I/F appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Unblock] or [Block].
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu.
8-213
Default Setting (System Menu)
Security Level (Security Level setting) The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu.
8-214
Default Setting (System Menu)
Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Opt. Functions See Optional Function on page Appendix-6.
8
8-215
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-216
9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement. • • •
Cleaning ....................................................................... 9-2 Toner Container Replacement...................................... 9-4 Replacing the Waste Toner Box ................................... 9-6
9-1
Maintenance
Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent. IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor, clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning.
NOTE: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
1
Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass (a).
2
Wipe the white guide (b) on the document processor.
3
Close the document processor.
a
b
9-2
Maintenance
Cleaning the paper transfer unit CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury. The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container and waste toner box are replaced. To maintain optimum print quality, it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month as well as when the toner container is replaced. It should also be cleaned if streaking or lines appear on printed copies, or if printouts appear faint or blurred.
1
2
Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear cover.
Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to touch the black transfer roller and black transfer belt during cleaning as this may adversely affect print quality.
Paper Transfer Unit Transfer Belt (Black) Registration Roller (Metal) Transfer Roller (Black) Duplex Unit Paper Ramp
3
9-3
Close the rear cover.
9
Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner. Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. For details, refer to Cleaning the paper transfer unit on page 9-3.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Toner Container Replacement 1
While pulling the top cover lever, open the top tray.
CAUTION: To prevent toppling, the top tray and document processor cannot be opened at the same time.
Open the top tray to the position shown. If the tray is not opened to this position, it will not be possible to install the toner container.
2
Carefully remove the old toner container from the machine.
NOTE: Put the old toner container in the plastic bag (supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal.
3
9-4
Take the new toner container out of the toner kit. Shake the new toner container at least 5 or 6 times as shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container.
Maintenance
4
Make sure the release lever is in the release position and set the new toner container in the machine.
NOTE: Make sure, that the projections of the toner container fit to the slots inside the machine.
5
Push down on the top of the toner container to install it firmly in place.
9
6
Close the top tray. When closing the top tray, do not press hard on the operation panel.
NOTE: When closing the top tray, take care not to pinch your fingers.
9-5
Maintenance
Replacing the Waste Toner Box Replace the waste toner box when the Check waste toner box message is displayed. A new waste toner box is included with the toner kit. The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the machine will operate.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Replacing the Waste Toner Box 1
Open the waste toner cover.
2
Press the lock button and gently remove the waste toner box.
NOTE: Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so as not to scatter the toner inside. Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward.
3 Old Waste Toner Box
Close the cap to the old waste toner box after removing the box from the machine.
NOTE: Put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag (supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal.
9-6
Maintenance
4
Open the cap of the new waste toner box.
5
Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the figure. When the box is set correctly, it will snap into place.
6
Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly inserted and close the waste toner cover.
New Waste Toner Box
After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box, clean the paper transfer unit. For instructions, refer to Cleaning on page 9-2.
9
9-7
Maintenance
Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non-use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet. We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine is used next time. Moving the Machine When you move the machine: •
Move it gently.
•
Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine.
•
Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine.
•
Lock the lock lever (Yellow) for the optical system. It is located at the upper left edge close to the scanner. Refer to Quick Start Guide.
•
Remove all toner containers and waster toner box and put them in a plastic bag.
•
Make sure that the release lever is in LOCK position. If not, pull the release lever towards you until it stops. Refer to page 9-5.
WARNING: If you ship the machine, remove and pack all toner containers and the waste toner box in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the machine.
9-8
10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine. • • •
Solving Malfunctions................................................... 10-2 Responding to Error Messages .................................. 10-8 Clearing Paper Jams ................................................ 10-16
10-1
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
The operation panel does not respond when the main power switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
—
Pressing the Start key does not produce copies.
Is there a message on the Message Display?
Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly.
—
Is the machine in Sleep mode?
Press the Energy saver key to recover the machine from Sleep mode. The machine will be ready to copy within 20 seconds.
2-9
Are the originals loaded correctly?
When placing originals on the platen, place them face-down and align them with the original size indicator plates.
2-65
When placing originals in the document processor, place them face-up.
2-67
—
Check that the application software is correctly operated.
—
Is the machine in Auto Density mode?
Set the correct density level for auto density.
—
Is the machine in Manual Density mode?
Select the correct density level.
5-16
Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container?
Shake the toner container from side to side about several times.
9-4
Is there a message indicating the addition of toner?
Replace the toner container.
9-4
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
2-47
Is EcoPrint mode enabled?
Disable EcoPrint mode.
4-10
—
Make sure the paper type setting is correct the paper being used.
8-13 8-16
—
Conduct color calibration either by switching the machine off then on or using the operation panel.
8-126
—
Try adjusting the color control settings using the printer driver.
—
Blank sheets are ejected.
Faint or blurred printing
10-2
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
—
Run [MC] and decrease the adjustment value. Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value. If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1 level again. If there is still no improvement, return the setting to the original value.
8-138
Is the machine in Auto Density mode?
Select the correct density level for auto density.
—
Is the machine in Manual Density mode?
Select the correct density level.
5-16
—
Conduct color calibration using the operation panel.
8-126
Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly).
Is the original a printed photograph?
Set the image quality to [Photo].
5-15
Printouts are not clear.
Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
5-15
Printouts are dirty.
Is the platen or the document processor dirty?
Clean the platen or the document processor.
—
Printouts are fuzzy.
Is the machine being used in very humid conditions?
Use in a location that has suitable humidity.
—
Images are skewed.
Are the originals placed correctly?
When placing originals on the platen, align them with the original size indicator plates.
2-65
When placing originals in the document processor, align the original width guides securely before placing the originals.
2-66
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Check the position of the paper width guides.
2-66
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Load the paper correctly.
2-47
Is the paper of the supported type? Is it in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and reload it.
2-47
Printouts are too dark.
Paper often jams.
10-3
10
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Reference Page
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper.
2-47
Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper.
10-16
Printouts are wrinkled or curled.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
2-47
Cannot print.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
—
Is the machine powered on?
Turn on the main power switch.
2-7
Is the printer cable or network cable connected?
Connect the correct printer cable or network cable securely.
2-5
Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected?
Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable.
2-5 2-7
Is the print job paused?
Press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to resume printing.
7-19
Documents are printed improperly.
Are the application software settings at the PC set properly?
Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly.
—
Cannot print with USB memory.
Is the USB host blocked?
Select [Unblock] in the USB host settings.
8-209
—
Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine.
—
When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC, an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally.
Have you selected 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution?
Select a scan resolution other than 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi Super Fine when sending an image.
5-17
USB memory not recognized.
—
Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine.
—
Is the USB host blocked?
Select [Unblock] in the USB host settings.
8-209
—
Conduct color registration using the operation panel.
8-127
Conduct color calibration using the operation panel.
8-126
Skewed-color printout
10-4
Troubleshooting
Symptom Printouts have black lines.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Is the slit glass dirty?
Clean the slit glass.
9-2
—
Run [LaserScanner Cln].
8-135
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
8-136
Grey background
—
Conduct color calibration either by switching the machine off then on or using the operation panel.
8-126
Dirt on the top edge or back of the paper
Is the paper transfer unit dirty?
Clean the transfer unit.
9-3
Offset occures.
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
8-136
—
Run [MC] and increase the adjustment value. Increase the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value. If there is no improvement after the value is increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level again. If there is still no improvement, return the setting to the original value.
8-138
—
Run [MC] and decrease the adjustment value. Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value. If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1 level again. If there is still no improvement, return the setting to the original value.
8-138
Part of the image is periodically faint or blurred.
10-5
10
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Irregular horizontal lines appear in the image.
—
Run [MC] and decrease the adjustment value. Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value. If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1 level again. If there is still no improvement, return the setting to the original value.
8-138
The altitude is 1500 m or higher and irregular horizontal white lines appear in the image.
—
Run [Altitude Adj.] and set the adjustment value to [High 1]. If there is no improvement when the value is set to [High 1], set to [High 2].
8-137
The altitude is 1500 m or higher and dots appear in the image.
—
Run [Altitude Adj.] and set the adjustment value to [High 1]. If there is no improvement when the value is set to [High 1], set to [High 2].
8-137
Part of the image is periodically faint or shows white lines.
—
Open and then close the rear cover.
—
—
Run [Drum Refresh].
8-136
The background density is obtrusive.
—
Carry out Background Density.
4-23
Colors appear different than you anticipated.
Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
3-10 5-15
Have you loaded color copy paper into the paper tray?
Load color copy paper into the paper tray.
2-47
—
Run [Color Calibration].
8-126
10-6
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Cannot send via SMB.
* **
Reference Page
When making copies Adjust the color balance.
Appendix23
When printing from a computer Adjust the color using the printer driver.
Printer Driver Operation Guide
Is the network cable connected?
Connect the correct network cable securely.
2-5
Have the network settings for the equipment been configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings properly.
2-17 8-175
Have the folder sharing settings been configured properly?
Check sharing settings and access privileges under the folder properties.
3-32
Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]?
Set the SMB protocol setting to [On].
3-27
Has the [Host Name] been entered properly?
Check the name of the computer to which data is being sent.*
3-31
Has the [Path] been entered properly?
Check the share name for the shared folder.
—
Has the [Login User Name] been entered properly?
Check the domain name and login user name.**
3-27
Has the same domain name been used for the [Host Name] and [Login User Name]?
Delete the domain name and backslash ("\") from the [Login User Name].
3-27
Has the [Login Password] been entered properly?
Check the login password.
3-27
Have exceptions for Windows Firewall been configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows Firewall properly.
3-36 3-39
Do the time settings for the equipment, domain server, and data destination computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server, and data destination computer to the same time.
—
Is the touch panel displaying Send error.?
Refer to Responding to Send Error.
10-11
You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com). You can also enter login user names in the following formats: Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith) User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-7
10
Troubleshooting
Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Alphanumeric Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Error Message
Checkpoints
Load paper in cassette 1.
Is the indicated cassette out of paper?
Load paper.
2-48
Load paper in MP Tray.
Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray?
Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicated on the Message Display.
2-51
Toner is running out. [C], [M], [Y], [K]
–
It is almost time to replace the toner container. After a certain number of pages (about 20) are printed, printing will stop. Obtain a new toner container of the color indicated in [].
9-4
Replace the toner container. Replace with a toner container of the color indicated in [].
9-4
Add toner. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Check waste toner box.
Is the waste toner box full?
Replace the waste toner box.
9-6
Is the waste toner box installed?
Install the waste toner box in the machine.
9-6
Cannot connect to Authentication Server.
–
Press the OK key and check the following items:
—
•
Registration to Authentication Server
•
Password and computer address for Authentication Server
•
Connection of Network
Cannot duplex print on this paper.
Did you select a paper size/ media type that cannot be duplex printed?
Select the available paper type. Press the OK key to print without using Duplex.
3-15
Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled.
–
This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting. Press the OK key.
—
Close top (rear or left) cover.
Is there any cover which is open?
Close the cover indicated on the control panel.
—
Close Document Processor.
Is the document processor open?
Close the document processor.
—
Is the top cover of the document processor open?
Close the top cover of the document processor.
2-66
10-8
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print.
–
The job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan.
–
The job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Polling box limit exceeded.
–
FAX box is full, and no further storage is available. The job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Incorrect Login User Name or Password. Job Is canceled.
–
Enter correct Login User Name or Login Password.
—
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled.
Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting. Cannot print any more. This job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Machine failure. Call service.
–
Internal error has occurred. Make a note of the error code displayed on the Message Display. Turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Service Representative.
—
Is Error code "4201 to 4204" displayed?
Internal condensation has occurred as a result of a sudden change in temperature. Turn off the machine and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes, and then back on again. If this message still remains, turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Service Representative.
—
–
Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up. Press the OK key to print the scanned pages. The print job cannot be processed completely. Press the Status/Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely.
10-9
10
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Memory is full. Job is canceled.
–
Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up. Press the OK key. To print the same originals, follow the operations below. • Select [Photo] for the quality of copies. • Select a nagative value for the sharpness. • Select the paper size smaller to reduce. If it is not resolved, expand the printer memory.
—
Paper jammed.
–
If a paper jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the Message Display. Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper.
10-16
Job not stored. Press [OK].
–
Press the OK key to cancel storing.
USB memory error. Job is canceled.
–
This job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Place original and press Start key.
–
Remove originals from the document processor, put them back in their original order, and place them again. Press the Start key to resume printing. Press the Status/Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
2-67
Remove original from document processor.
Are there any originals left in the document processor?
Remove originals from the document processor.
—
Maximum Number of scanned pages. Job is canceled.
–
Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner. The job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded?
Press the OK key to print, send or store the scanned pages. Press the Status/Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Error occurred. Turn the main power switch off and on.
–
System error has occurred. Turn the main power switch off and on.
—
Incorrect account ID.
–
The Account ID does not match. Check the registered Account ID.
—
10-10
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
File is not found.
–
The specified file is not found. The job is canceled. Press the OK key.
—
Top tray is full of Paper. Remove the paper.
–
Remove paper from the top tray, and press the OK key to resume the job.
—
Unknown toner Installed.
Is the installed toner container our own brand?
We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
—
Unknown toner Installed. PC
Does the installed toner container's regional specification match the machine's?
Install the specified container.
—
Insufficient memory. Cannot start the job
–
Further scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory. Press the OK key to print the scanned pages. Press the Status/ Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Replace MK.
–
Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 200,000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing. Contact your service technician.
—
An error has occurred during transmission. The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows.
—
Send error. ####
–
10
Scan to SMB Error Code Error Code:1101
Is the host name of the SMB server incorrect?
10-11
Set the correct host name in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Troubleshooting
Error Message Error Code:1102
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Is a domain name entered?
Correctly enter the user name in the "domain\user", "domain\user" or "domain@user" format.
—
Did you specify an invalid user or password?
Enter the correct user name and password.
—
Did you specify an invalid folder name or share name?
Enter the correct folder name and share name.
—
Did you specify a user who is not allowed to access the folder, or has access permission been set for the folder?
Check the access restrictions of the destination folder.
—
Are prohibited characters included in the host name?
Check if any of the following characters are included in the host name. `~!@#$^&*()=+[]{}\|;:'"< >/?
—
Is a domain name entered?
Correctly enter the user name in the "domain\user", "domain\user" or "domain@user" format.
—
Is the correct folder path entered?
Enter the correct folder path.
—
Did you specify a user who is not allowed to access the folder, or has access permission been set for the folder?
Check the access restrictions of the destination folder.
—
Error Code:1105
Is SMB protocol enabled?
Enable SMB protocol for the host name in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Error Code:2101, 2201, 2203
Did you enter an invalid host name or IP address?
Enter the correct host name or IP address.
—
Is the wrong port number specified?
Specify the correct port number.
—
Are you correctly connected to the network?
Make sure that the network cable has been correctly connected. Make sure that the network environment (server, hub, or other LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Error Code:1103
10-12
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Error Code:0007, 5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, 7101, 720f
–
Turn the main power switch off and then on. If this occurs repeatedly, write down the error code that appears in the message display and contact a service technician. (See the procedure in Machine failure. Call service.)
—
Error Code:9181
Have more than 999 original pages been scanned?
If there are more than 999 original pages, send the pages in separate batches.
—
Scan To FTP Error Code Error Code:1101
Is the host name of the FTP server incorrect?
Set the correct host name in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Error Code:1102
Is a domain name entered?
Correctly enter the user name in the "domain\user" or "domain\user" format.
—
Did you specify an invalid user or password?
Enter the correct user name and password.
—
Is the correct folder path entered?
Enter the correct folder path.
—
Did you specify a user who is not allowed to access the folder, or has access permission been set for the folder?
Check the access restrictions of the destination folder.
—
Error Code:1105
Is FTP protocol enabled?
Enable FTP protocol in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Error Code:1131
Is one of the FTPS settings incorrect?
Check the security settings.
—
Error Code:1132
Are you trying to send to a server that does not support FTPS service or the encryption method?
Check if the server supports FTPS. Check if the server supports the encryption method.
—
Error Code:1103
10-13
10
Troubleshooting
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Error Message
Checkpoints
Error Code:2101, 2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, 2203, 2231, 3101
Did you enter an invalid host name or IP address?
Enter the correct host name or IP address.
—
Is the wrong port number specified?
Specify the correct port number.
—
Are you correctly connected to the network?
Make sure that the network cable has been correctly connected. Make sure that the network environment (server, hub, or other LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Error Code:4701, 5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, 7102, 720f
–
Turn the main power switch off and then on. If this occurs repeatedly, write down the error code that appears in the message display and contact a service technician. (See the procedure in Machine failure. Call service.)
—
Error Code:9181
Have more than 999 original pages been scanned?
If there are more than 999 original pages, send the pages in separate batches.
—
Scan To Email Error Code Error Code:1101
Is the SMTP/POP3 server name incorrect?
Set the correct server name in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Error Code:1102
Did you specify an invalid user or password?
Enter the correct user name and password.
—
Error Code:1104
Did you specify the destination address?
Specify the destination address.
—
Error Code:1105
Is SMTP protocol enabled?
Enable SMTP protocol in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Error Code:2101, 2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, 2203
Is "Other Authenticate" selected when POP before SMTP authentication is performed?
Select a valid POP3 user other than "Other".
—
Is the specified server an SMTP server?
Set the correct server name in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Are you correctly connected to the network?
Make sure that the network cable has been correctly connected. Make sure that the network environment (server, hub, or other LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Were you attempting to send too much data?
Change the size that can be sent in Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Error Code:2204
10-14
Troubleshooting
Error Message Error Code:3101
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference Page
Is the server operating correctly?
Make sure that the network environment (server, hub, or other LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Is an authentication method set for which the server cannot respond normally?
Check the settings on the server and client. (For example, make sure the SMTP/POP authentication enable/ disable settings are the same on the server and on the client.)
—
Error Code:3201
Is a non-supported SMTP authentication method enabled?
Check the SMTP authentication settings on the server and client. The SMTP authentication methods below can be used on the machine. CRAM-MD5 / DIGEST-MD5 / PLAIN / LOGIN
—
Error Code:4201, 5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, 7101, 7102, 720f
–
Turn the main power switch off and then on. If this occurs repeatedly, write down the error code that appears in the message display and contact a service technician. (See the procedure in Machine failure. Call service.)
—
Error Code:9181
Have more than 999 original pages been scanned?
If there are more than 999 original pages, send the pages in separate batches.
—
10-15
10
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Remove jammed paper. After removing jammed paper, the machine will re-start printing. Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below. Detailed paper jam positions are as follows. Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam.
Paper Jam Location
Description
Reference Page
A
Paper jam in the multi purpose tray.
10-16
B
Paper jam in the machine cassette, or in a cassette of the optional paper feeder.
10-18
C
Paper jam in the paper feeder.
10-19
D
Paper jam in the transfer unit.
10-19
E
Paper jam in the document processor.
10-20
Paper jams If paper jams occur frequently, the specifications of the paper may not be suitable for the machine. Try changing the paper type. For paper specifications, see "Paper Specifications" in the Appendix. Also refer to chapter 2 to how to insert paper correctly. If paper jams still occur frequently even though you have changed the paper, the machine may have a problem. Please contact your service representative. IMPORTANT: When removing a paper jam, make sure that no torn pieces of paper remain in the machine.
10-16
Troubleshooting
Online Help Messages The online Help message function of the machine will show the procedure for removing a paper jam in the message display. When Paper Jam is displayed, press [Help](the Left Select key) to display the procedure to clear the jam. Press to display the next step or press to display the previous step. Press the OK key to exit the online help message display. When a paper jam occurs, you can use the online Help message to remove the paper jam.
Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Multi Purpose tray.
1
Remove the paper jammed at the Multi Purpose tray.
IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed, do not try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on page 10-19.
2
Pull the cassette 1 out of the machine.
10
3
10-17
Open the lower feed cover.
Troubleshooting
4
Remove any partially fed paper.
After you have removed the paper jam, replace the lower feed cover.
5
Replace the cassette 1 in the machine.
Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder In the event that a paper jam occurs in the cassette 1, follow the procedure below to remove the jam. Paper jams in the cassette of the optional paper feeder are removed in the same way.
1
Pull out the cassette 1 or optional paper feeder.
2
Remove any partially fed paper.
IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed, do not try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on page 10-19.
3
Replace the cassette 1 in the machine.
NOTE: In case of jam check that the paper was loaded into the cassette correctly.
10-18
Troubleshooting
Paper jam in the paper feeder If the paper jam cannot be removed using the procedure in paper jam in the paper cassette on page 10-18, open the rear cover of the paper feeder and remove the jammed paper.
NOTE: If the paper cannot be removed, do not try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on page 10-19.
Inside the Machine 1
Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear cover.
CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
2
If most of the jammed paper is out in the top tray, grasp the paper and pull it out.
3
If the jammed paper reaches the fuser unit as shown, open the fuser cover, grasp the paper, and pull it out.
Fuser Cover
10-19
10
Troubleshooting
4
If the jammed paper does not reach the registration roller (metal) as shown, grasp the paper and pull it out.
5
If the jammed paper is located inside the machine as shown, open the rear feed cover and pull out the paper.
6
If the jammed paper reaches the Duplex Unit as shown, lift up the Duplex Unit and remove the paper.
7
Close the rear cover. The error will be cleared and printing will resume after warm-up.
Registration Roller
Rear Feed Cover
Duplex Unit
Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor.
1
10-20
Remove all of the originals from the document feed tray.
Troubleshooting
2
Open the left cover of the document processor.
3
Remove the jammed original. If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to remove, proceed to the next step.
4
Open the document processor.
10 5
Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
6
Close the document processor.
7
Place the originals.
10-21
Troubleshooting
10-22
11 Management This chapter explains the following operations. • • •
User Login Administration .......................................... 11-2 Job Accounting ......................................................... 11-13 Checking the Counter............................................... 11-35
11-1
Management
User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct Login User Name and Login Password for user authentication to log in. Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator.
First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration. Enable user login administration. (page 11-3) Add a user.(page 11-6) Log out.(page 11-5) The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-5)
Displaying user login administration 1
The system/counter menu appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ********************* 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ]
Press the system menu / counter key on the operation panel.
2
From the system menu / counter menu, press the or key to select [User/Job Account].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and press [Login] (the Right Select key). For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below. Login User Name
2600
Login Password
2600
3
11-2
Press the OK key. The User/Job Account menu appears.
Management
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods: Item
Description
Local Authentication
User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.
Network Authentication
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List 3 Group Auth. [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
Press the or key to select [User Login Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears.
4
11-3
Press the or key to select [User Login].
11
Management
User Login: a b 1 *Off 2 Local Authentic. ********************* 3 Netwk Authentic.
5
Press the OK key. User Login appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key. Select [Off] to disable user login administration. When "Network Authentication" is selected, select [NTLM], [Kerberos], or [Ext.] for the server type and press the OK key.
Server type: a b 1 NTLM ********************* 2 Kerberos 3 Ext.
If [NTLM] or [Kerberos] is selected for the server type, enter the host name (up to 64 characters) and domain name (up to 256 characters) of the authentication server, and press the OK key. If [Ext.] is selected for the server type, enter the host name (up to 64 characters) and port number of the authentication server, and press the OK key.
A b
Host Name: GUI*
[
ABC Text
]
NOTE: If the Login User Name and Login Password are rejected, check the following settings. •
Network Authentication setting of the machine
•
User property of the Authentication Server
•
Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the User Login Set. menu.
11-4
Management
Login/Logout Once you enable user login administration, a Login User Name and Login Password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Login Log in using the procedure below.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
1
If the screen below appears during the operations, perform the following login operations.
2
Press the OK key, enter the Login User Name, and then press the OK key.
3
Press the key to select [Login Password], press the OK key, enter the Login Password, and then press the OK key.
4
Check the Login User Name and Login Password are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
]
Logout To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return to the Login User Name/Login Password entry screen. Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases: •
When the Energy Saver key is pressed to enter the sleep mode
•
When auto sleep is activated
•
When auto panel reset is activated
11-5
11
Management
Adding a User This adds a new user. You can add Up to 100 users (including the default Login User Name). The table below explains the user information to be registered. Item
Description
User Name*
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name*
Enter the Login User Name to log in (up to 32 characters). The same Login User Name cannot be registered.
Login Password*
Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters).
Access Level*
Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can log in without entering the account ID. Refer to Job Accounting on page 11-13.
E-mail Address
The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
*
Mandatory at user registration.
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. The following are the default user's properties. User Name: Login User Name: Login Password: Access Level:
DeviceAdmin 2600 2600 Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, Login User Name and Login Password regularly for your security. Use the procedure below to register a new user.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
1
Log in as a user with administrator rights.
2
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
3
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [User Login Set.].
11-6
Management
User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login 2 Local User List ********************* 3 Group Auth. [ Exit ]
Local User List: a b l Admin l DeviceAdmin ********************* [
Menu
T b S
[
ABC Text
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Local User List].
6
Press the OK key. Local User List appears.
7
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the or key to select [Add User], and then press the OK key.
8
Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter the Login User Name in the next screen, and then press the OK key.
]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add User *********************
User Name: *
4
11
]
l User01: a b 1 Exit ********************* 2 Detail
Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin l Admin l User 1 ********************* [ Menu ]
9
Press the or key to select [Exit] and then press the OK key. Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see information of the registered users.
10 In Local User List, press the or key to select the added user and then press the OK key.
11-7
Management
Detail: Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO [
C b 3/6
Edit
11 Press the or key to select [Login Password:], press [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the Login Password, and then press the OK key.
]
12 Enter the same Login Password to confirm and press the OK key.
Detail: C b p E-mailAddress: 4/6 ******@abcdef.jp [
Detail: Access Level: Administrator
Edit
13 Press the key to select [E-mailAddress:], press [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the e-mail address, and then press the OK key.
]
C b 5/6
[ Change ]
Detail: C b Account Name: 6/6 k ################ [ Change ]
14 Press the key to select [Access Level:], press [Change] (the Right Select key), select the user access privilege, and then press the OK key.
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator, [Change] is not displayed.
15 Press the key to select [Account Name:], press [Change] (the Right Select key), select the account, and then press the OK key.
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is not displayed.
16 After entering the user information, press the OK key again. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Local User List.
Changing User Properties User information can be changed. It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges. Use the procedure below to change the user properties.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
11-8
Management
User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login 2 Local User List ********************* 3 Group Auth. [ Exit ]
Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin ********************* l Admin l User1 [ Menu ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [User Login Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Local User List].
5
Press the OK key. Local User List appears.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing user information
Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin l Admin ********************* l User1 [ Menu ]
C b 1/6
Detail: User Name: User1 [
Edit
1
Press the or key to select the user whose information you want to change, and then press the OK key.
2
In the same fashion as registering a new user, press the or key to select the desired item, press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change information, and then press the OK key.
3
Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.
4
After completing changing the user information, press the OK key again.
]
11-9
11
Management
5
The overwrite confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List.
Deleting a user
Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin l Admin ********************* l User1 [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add User
1
Press the or key to select the user you want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select key).
2
Press the or key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key.
3
In the delete confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user is deleted and the screen returns to Local User List.
Enabling/Disabling Group Authentication This enables group authentication using the LDAP server. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method. For details of LDAP server settings, refer to the Operation Guide of the LDAP server. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method. Use the procedure below to enable group authentication.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. You can configure detail settings of group authentication in Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List 3 Group Auth. [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
Press the or key to select [User Login Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Group Auth.].
11-10
Management
Group Auth.: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
5
Press the OK key. Group Auth. appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu.
Displaying Network User Property Use the procedure below to display the property of the user logged on using the network authentication. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List 3 Group Auth. [ Exit ]
NW User Property: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
Press the or key to select [User Login Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears.
11 4
Press the or key to select [NW User Property].
5
Press the OK key. NW User Property appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On] or [Off].
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu.
11-11
Management
Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown Login User Name. If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown. The table below shows the available settings. Item
Description
Reject
The job is rejected (not printed).
Permit
The job is permitted to be printed.
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job ********************* [ Exit ]
Unknown ID Job: a b 1 *Reject ********************* 2 Permit
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Unknown ID Job].
3
Press the OK key. Unknown ID Job appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Reject] or [Permit].
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu.
11-12
Management
Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. •
Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts.
•
Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
•
Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
•
Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
•
Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
•
Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup. Enable job accounting. (page 11-13) Add an account. (page 11-18) Log out. (page 11-15) Other users log in for operations. (page 11-15)
11
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
11-13
Management
Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 AccountingAccess 3 Account. Report [ Exit ]
Job Accounting: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Job Accounting].
5
Press the OK key. Job Accounting appears.
6
Press the or key to select [On]. To disable job accounting, select [Off].
7
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account. Set. menu.
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
11-14
Management
Login/Logout If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout. Login
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Account ID:
b
******************* [Counter ]
1
In the screen below, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and press the OK key.
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the Clear key and enter the account ID again. If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID. By pressing [Counter] (the Left Select key), you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. When the screen to enter the Login User Name and Login Password appears If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the Login User Name and Login Password appears. Enter a Login User Name and Login Password to log in. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 115.) If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6.)
2
Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen.
11-15
11
Management
AccountingAccess Set the job accounting access. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting access setting.
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ]
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 AccountingAccess 3 Account. Report [ Exit ]
AccountingAccess: a b 1 *Local ********************* 2 Network
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.
2
Press the or key to select [User/Job Account].
3
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4
The User/Job Account menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
6
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [AccountingAccess].
8
Press the OK key. AccountingAccess appears.
11-16
Management
9
Press the or key to select [Local] or[Network].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account. Set. menu.
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
11
11-17
Management
Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required. Item
Description
Account Name
Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction
This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22.
Use the procedure below to register a new account.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Total Accounting 5 Each Job Account 6 Account. List ********************* [ Exit ]
Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k ########### [ Menu ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Account. List].
5
Press the OK key. Account. List appears.
11-18
Management
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add Account *********************
Account Name: *
[
T b S ABC Text
Account ID:
6
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the or key to select [Add Account], and then press the OK key.
7
Enter the account name and press the OK key.
8
Enter the account code and press the OK key.
]
b
******************* S
k Dep.01: a b 1 Exit ********************* 2 Detail
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
9
Press the or key to select [Exit] and then press the OK key. Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see information of the registered accounts.
10 Account. List is displayed and the new account is added to the account list.
Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account. Use the procedure below to manage accounts.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
11-19
11
Management
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Total Accounting 5 Each Job Account 6 Account. List ********************* [ Exit ]
Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k ########### [ Menu ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Account. List].
5
Press the OK key. Account. List appears.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing account information
1
Press the or key to select the account whose information you want to change, and then press the OK key.
2
Press the or key to select the item you want to change, press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change account information and restriction of use, and then press the OK key.
Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k ########### [ Menu ]
Detail: C b Account Name: 1/7 Osaka GUI Design [
Edit
]
NOTE: Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22.
3
11-20
Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.
Management
Overwrite. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [
Yes
] [
No
4
After completing changing the account information, press the OK key again. A confirmation screen appears.
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account information is changed. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List.
]
Deleting an account
Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k ########### [ Menu ]
Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add Account
Delete. Are you sure? z k UI R&D DEPT. [
Yes
] [
No
1
Press the or key to select the account you want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select key).
2
Press the or key to select [Delete].
3
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
11 ]
4
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account is deleted. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List.
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-29 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-33 for details. Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.
11-21
Management
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 AccountingAccess 3 Account. Report [ Exit ]
Default Setting: a b 1 Apply Limit 2 Copy/Print Count ********************* 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ]
Copy/Print Count:a b 1 Total 2 *Split *********************
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Default Setting].
5
Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Copy/Print Count].
7
Press the OK key. Copy/Print Count appears.
8
Press the or key to select [Total] or [Split].
9
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu.
Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available. The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-21.
11-22
Management Restriction Items [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item
Detail
Copier print limit (total)
A limit can be set for the total number of full color copies, monochrome copies, and black & white copies.
Copier print limit (full color)
A limit can be set for the number of full color copies.
Printer print limit (total)
A limit can be set for the total number of pages printed in color and black & white.
Printer print limit (color)
A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in color.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
Fax TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on products with the fax function installed)
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item
Detail
Print limit (total)
A limit can be set for the total number of printer and copier pages printed.
Print limit (full color)
A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in full color.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
Fax TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on products with the fax function installed)
11-23
11
Management Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Item
Description
Off
No restriction given
Counter Limit
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage
Restriction is applied.
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.
Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k ########### [ Menu ]
Detail: C b Print Restrict.: 4/6 Total Off [ Edit ]
Detail: C b Print Restrict.: 4/7 Copier Off [ Edit ]
Print Restrict.: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Counter Limit 3 Reject Usage
1
Follow steps 1 to 7 of Adding an Account on page 11-18.
2
In Account. List, press the or key to select the account to which you want to set restriction of use, and then press the OK key.
3
Press the or key to select the item to be restricted and then press [Edit] (the Right Select key).
When selecting [Split] in Copy/Print Count, screen changes as shown in the left.
4
11-24
Press the or key to select the desired restriction method and then press the OK key.
Management If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit number of pages in the next screen, and then press the OK key.
Limit Pages: D b (1 - 9999999) **123456*pages
Overwrite. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [
Yes
] [
No
5
Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary.
6
Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen appears.
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The restriction of use is changed. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List.
]
Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below describes the action taken. Item
Description
Immediately *
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently
Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected.
Alert Only
Job continues while displaying an alert message.
*
The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
11-25
11
Management
Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Total Accounting 5 Each Job Account ********************* 6 Account. List [ Exit ]
Default Setting: a b 1 Apply Limit ********************* 2 Copy/Print Count 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ]
Apply Limit: a b 1 Immediately 2 *Subsequently ********************* 3 Alert Only
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Default Setting].
5
Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Apply Limit].
7
Press the OK key. Apply Limit appears.
8
Press the or key to select [Immediately], [Subsequently] or [Alert Only].
9
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu.
11-26
Management
Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments. The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/ Printer Counts on page 11-21. Available Settings [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item
Detail
Copier print limit (total)
A default value can be set for the total color copy and black & white copy limit.
Copier print limit (full color)
A default value can be set for the full color copy limit.
Printer print limit (total)
A default value can be set for the total color and black & white printed page limit.
Printer print limit (color)
A default value can be set for the color printed page limit.
Scan Restriction (Other)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the fax function installed)
11
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item
Detail
Print limit (total)
A default value can be set for the full color printed page limit.
Print limit (full color)
Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Other)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the fax function installed)
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.
11-27
Management
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 AccountingAccess 3 Account. Report [ Exit ]
Default Setting: a b 1 Apply Limit ********************* 2 Copy/Print Count 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ]
Counter Limit: a b 1 Copy Restriction ********************* 2 Print Restrict. 3 ScanRest.(Other)
Copy(Total): D b (1 - 9999999) **123456*
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Default Setting].
5
Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select [Counter Limit].
7
Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears.
8
Press the or key to select the item for which you want to set the default restriction on the number of sheets, and then press the OK key.
9
Use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets, and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Counter Limit.
10 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions on the number of sheets.
11-28
Management
Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time. Types of the counts are as follows. Item
Detail
Printed Pages
Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can also use [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check the number of pages used.
Scanned Pages
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX TX Pages*
Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX TX Time*
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
*
Only on products with the fax function installed
Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time. Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 AccountingAccess 3 Account. Report [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Total Accounting].
11-29
11
Management
Total Accounting:a b 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 FAX TX Pages [ Exit ]
5
Press the OK key. The Total Accounting menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select the function of which you want to check counts, and then press the OK key. If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for which you want to check printed page counts, and then press the OK key. Press the or key to switch the counted items. If you select [Scanned Pages], press the or key to switch the counted items.
Copy/Print Pages:C b Copy(B & W): 1/5 1234567
Total Accounting:a b 1 Printed Pages 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset ********************* [ Exit ]
Reset counter. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting [
Yes
] [
No
7
After confirming the content, press the OK key. The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu.
8
To reset the counter, press the or key to select [Counter Reset].
9
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
]
10 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Total Accounting menu. Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.
11-30
Management
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Total Accounting 5 Each Job Account ********************* 6 Account. List [ Exit ]
Each Job Account: a b k Osaka GUI DESIGN ********************* k ########### k UI R&D DEPT.
Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Each Job Account].
5
Press the OK key. The Each Job Accounting menu appears.
6
Press the or key to select the account of which you want to check counts.
7
Press the OK key. A menu for the account appears.
8
Press the or key to select the function of which you want to check counts, and then press the OK key. If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for which you want to check printed page counts, and then press the OK key. Press the or key to switch the counted items.
11-31
11
Management If you select [Scanned Pages], press the or key to switch the counted items.
Copy/Print Pages:C b Copy(B & W): 1/5 1234567 Limit:1234567
If the number of output sheets is restricted by an account management function, the upper limit on the number of output sheets is also displayed.
9
Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset [ Exit ]
Yes
] [
No
10 To reset the counter, press the or key to select [Counter Reset].
11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
Reset counter. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [
After confirming the content, press the OK key. The screen returns to the menu for the account.
]
12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the account.
11-32
Management
Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size. Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ]
Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 AccountingAccess 3 Account. Report [ Exit ]
1
See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2
In the User/Job Account menu, press the or key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears.
4
Press the or key to select [Account. Report] and then press the OK key.
11-33
11
Management
Print. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting [
Yes
] [
No
5
]
11-34
In the confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left Select key). A job accounting report is printed.
Management
Checking the Counter You can check the number of pages printed and scanned. The number is counted by the following items: Item Printed Pages
Description
By Function
You can check the number of pages copied, faxed*, and printed, and the total number of pages used.
By Paper Size
You can check the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Scanned Pages
*
You can check the number of pages copied, faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the total number of pages used.
FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter ********************* 3 System/Network [ Exit ]
Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
1
Press the system menu / counter key, press or key to select [Counter] from the system menu / counter menu, and press the OK key.
2
If user control is available, the user authentication screen appears. Enter the Login User Name and Login Password, and press [Login]. In this case, log in with administrator authority. For the default Login User Name and Login Password, see Adding a User on page 11-6.
]
Counter: a b 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 Full Color Pages [ Exit ]
3
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. If you select [Printed Pages], select [by Function] or [by Paper Size] in the next screen, and then press the OK key.
Printed Pages: a b 1 by Function ********************* 2 by Paper Size [
Exit
Press the or key to select [Printed Pages], [Scanned Pages] or [Full Color Pages], and then press the OK key.
]
11-35
11
Management
Printed Pages: Copy(B & W): 1234567
C b 1/5
4
Press the or key to check the count.
5
After completing checking the count, press the OK key. The screen returns to the menu for the account.
11-36
Appendix • • • • • • • •
Optional Equipment ......................................... Appendix-2 Character Entry Method .................................. Appendix-9 Paper ............................................................. Appendix-13 Color balance adjustment.............................. Appendix-23 Sharpness adjustment................................... Appendix-24 Color saturation adjustment........................... Appendix-24 Specifications................................................. Appendix-25 Glossary ........................................................ Appendix-29
Appendix-1
Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
Expansion Memory
SSD
Wireless Network Interface Kit
Network Interface kit Cover Paper Feeder
Paper Feeder Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1.
NOTE: To allow paper to be removed when a paper jam occurs, there is a cover (rear cover) on the rear side of the paper feeder.
CAUTION: When using the paper feeder, be sure to replace the cover.
Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. You can select additional memory module from 256, 512 or 1024 MB. The maximum memory size is 2048 MB.
NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory.
Appendix-2
Precautions for Handling the Memory Module
Correct
Incorrect
To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic wrist strap, if possible, when you install the memory module. Installing the Memory Module
1
Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
2
Remove the right cover with a piece of metal similar to coin.
3
Open the inside cover.
4
Remove the memory module from its package.
Appendix-3
5
With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.
CAUTION: Before inserting a memory module in the machine, make sure that the machine is switched off.
6
Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.
7
Reinstall the right cover.
Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module, remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then, carefully push out the two socket clamps. Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove. Verifying the expanded memory To verify that the memory module is working properly, test it by printing a status page.
Card Authentication Kit User login administration can be performed using IC cards. To do so, it is necessary to register IC card information on the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the IC Card Authentication Kit Operation Guide.
SSD With SSD installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables highspeed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions. For details, refer to Document Box on page 6-1.
Option Interface Slot
Appendix-4
Network Interface Kit Along with the standard for the network interface on the machine, the network interface kit supports TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols, so that the machine can be used on network environments including Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, etc. The network interface kit must be installed in the option interface slot at the back of the machine as shown in the figure.
Option Interface Slot
CAUTION: Before installing, verify your network environment and other important information with your dealer.
Wireless Network Interface Kit This is a wireless network interface kit which supports the wireless network specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and 11 g/b. With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.
Option Interface Slot
CAUTION: Before installing, verify your network environment and other important information with your dealer.
USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one.
ThinPrint Option This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
Appendix-5
Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine. You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis. •
UG-33 (ThinPrint) (This application can only be activated in Europe.)
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ]
1
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
]
System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ]
Op Function: a b 1 ID-Card g ********************* 2 UG-33 T [ Menu
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System], and press the OK key.
2
The System menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Op Function].
4
Press the OK key. The Op Function menu appears.
5
Press the or key to select desired application.
]
Appendix-6
Licence On: a b 1 *Official ********************* 2 Trial
6
Press the OK key. The selected application menu appears.
7
Press the or key to select [Official] or [Trial]. If you select [Official], the License key entry screen is displayed. Enter the License key using the numeric keys and press the OK key. To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the License key.
Test the optional function for a limited time. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No
If you select [Trial] and press the OK key, the confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Right Select key).
]
8
Licensed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Op Function menu.
CAUTION: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the application. Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ]
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the or key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login User Name and Login Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Login
1
]
Appendix-7
System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ]
Op Function: a b 1 ID-Card g ********************* 2 UG-33 T [ Menu
2
The System menu appears.
3
Press the or key to select [Op Function].
4
Press the OK key. The Op Function menu appears.
5
Press [Menu] (the Left Select key).
6
Press the or key to select [Detail]. The detail setting screen appears.
]
Menu: a b 1 Licence On ********************* 2 Detail
You can now view detailed information on the selected application.
Appendix-8
Character Entry Method In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters.
Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters.
1
7
2
3
4
6
5
1. OK Key
Press this key to finalize the entered character(s).
2. Clear Key
Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of the line, the character to the left of it is deleted.
3. Back Key
Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen.
4. Cursor Keys
Use these to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.
5. Numeric Keys
Use these keys to select the character you want to enter.
6. Reset Key
Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen.
7. Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is displayed)
Appendix-9
Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters, the following three types are available: ABC 123 Symbols
To enter alphabets. To enter numerals. To enter symbols. In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right Select key) to select the type of characters you want to enter.
File name input: OsakaSD3*
[
123 Text
]
Current character type
[
ABC Text
]
[
123 Text
]
Each time you press [Text] (the Right Select key), the character type switches as follows: ABC, 123, Symbol, ABC ...
a b
Symbols:
[
Text
]
NOTE: By pressing on the numeric keys while entering characters, you can directly display the Symbols screen.
Appendix-10
Entering Characters After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters. Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed. Key
*
Entry mode
Available characters
Alphabetic/Symbol
.@-_/:¯1
Numeric
1
Alphabetic/Symbol
abcABC2
Numeric
2
Alphabetic/Symbol
defDEF3
Numeric
3
Alphabetic/Symbol
ghiGHI4
Numeric
4
Alphabetic/Symbol
jklJKL5
Numeric
5
Alphabetic/Symbol
mnoMNO6
Numeric
6
Alphabetic/Symbol
pqrsPQRS7
Numeric
7
Alphabetic/Symbol
tuvTUV8
Numeric
8
Alphabetic/Symbol
wxyzWXYZ9
Numeric
9
Alphabetic/Symbol
. , - _ ’ ! ? (space) 0
Numeric
0
Alphabetic/Symbol
Switch between upper-/lowercase
Numeric
* or . (decimal point)*
Alphabetic/Symbol Numeric
#
'*' is entered when [123] is selected in the character type selection, or '.' is entered when only numerals are entered and no character type is selected.
Appendix-11
Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it. If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there, spaces are automatically entered in between. Entering Symbols
a b
Symbols:
[
Text
Press [Text] (the Right Select key) or # on the numeric keys to display the Symbols screen. Use cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter and then press the OK key.
]
Entry When [Select Character] Is Selected in Login Operation Settings In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled, the character entry method may vary depending on the settings. (Refer to Login Operation on page 8-62.)
Login User Name: a b ######* *abcdefghijklmnopqrst uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO [ Next ]
If a character palette appears on the screen, use cursor keys to select the desired character from the displayed characters, and then press the OK key to enter it.
NOTE: Numerals can be entered directly by pressing numeric keys.
Appendix-12
Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassette Supported types Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)
Supported paper sizes A4, B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6, Envelope C5, 16K, 216 × 340 mm, ISO B5, Custom
No. of sheets 250 (80g/m2)
Optional paper feeder Supported types Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)
Supported paper sizes Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, B5, Folio, 16K, 216 × 340 mm, ISO B5, Envelope #6, Envelope C5, Youkei 2, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope #9, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom
No. of sheets 500 (80g/m2)
Optional paper feeder (Multi Purpose) Supported types
Supported paper sizes
No. of sheets
Plain (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Recycled (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 220g/m2)
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, B5, Folio, 16K, 216 × 340 mm, Custom
500 (80g/m2)
Envelopes
ISO B5, Envelope #6, Envelope C5, Youkei 2, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope #9, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Oufuku Hagaki
Loading height: 40mm
Appendix-13
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray) Supported types
Supported paper sizes
Plain, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Vellum, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K, 216×340 mm
Thick paper
A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6, B6, ISO B5, 16K
No. of sheets 50 (80g/m2)
Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to 356 mm 1
Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to 356 mm Postcards Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard)
Postcards (100 × 148 mm) Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)
15
Envelopes
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
5
Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to 356 mm Transparency (OHP film)
Letter, A4
Appendix-14
1
Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix. Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled. Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output. Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections for further details. Criteria Weight
Specifications Cassette 1: 60 to 163 g/m2 Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2
Thickness
0.086 to 0.110 mm
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
Moisture content
9%
Grain direction
Long grain (paper supply direction)
Pulp content
80% or more
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust. We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
Appendix-15
Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper. Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit. Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum. Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers. Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine. Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90° ± 0.2°. Multi Purpose Tray
Cassette 1 or Multi Purpose Tray
B6 (128 × 182 mm)
Letter
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")
Legal
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")
Statement
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")
Executive
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 × 7 1/2")
Oficio II
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Hagaki (100 × 148mm)
A5 (210 × 148 mm)
Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm)
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
Size Entry (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Folio (210 × 330 mm) 16K (273 × 197 mm) 216 × 340 mm Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)
Appendix-16
Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly. The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 163 g/m2 for the cassette 1 and between 60 and 220 g/m2 for the multi purpose tray. Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm. Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres. Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast. Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%. To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations. •
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
•
Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while.
•
Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
•
Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
•
Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications Porosity: The density of the paper fibers Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Appendix-17
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray. Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together. Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies. Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself. Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture. Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test. •
Glossy paper
•
Watermarked paper
•
Paper with an uneven surface
•
Perforated paper
Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media. The following paper and media can be used. •
Transparency (OHP film)
•
Rough
•
Vellum
•
Labels
•
Recycled
•
Preprinted
•
Bond
•
Cardstock
•
Color (Colour)
•
Prepunched
•
Letterhead
•
Envelope
•
Thick
•
Coated
•
High Quality
•
Custom 1 to 8
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.
Appendix-18
Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper. Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper. Transparency (OHP film) Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions. Criteria
Specifications
Heat resistance
Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness
0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material
Polyester
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine. If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected. Cardstock
Burrs Burrs
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams. Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices). Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Appendix-19
Envelopes Envelopes should always be fed from the Multi Purpose tray or paper feeder (multi purpose), with the print-side up. If you use envelopes quite often, we recommend to use the paper feeder (multi purpose). Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them. Keep the following points in mind. Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine. Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window. If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once. To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the top tray at once. Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters. Label Labels must be fed from the Multi Purpose tray or paper feeder (multi purpose). For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure. When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet Adhesive layer Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of labels may cause more problems.
Appendix-20
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure. Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output. Allowed
Not allowed Top sheet
Carrier sheet
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications. Item
Specifications
Top sheet weight
44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight (overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness
0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness
0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content
4 to 6 % (composite)
Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 15 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
NOTE: If you use colored paper quite often, we recommend to use paper feeder (multi purpose). Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 13 of the Appendix. The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars. Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 15 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.
Appendix-21
Coated Paper Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing. The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated side appears slightly glossy. IMPORTANT: When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the printer. Paper Type Indicators (paper feeder (multi purpose)) If you are going to load non-standard paper in the paper feeder (multi purpose), fold the provided paper type indicator sheet into thirds so that the appropriate paper type symbol faces out and is at the top, and insert it into the cassette's display folder. :Envelopes :Thick paper :Labels :Coated paper
The blank sheet can be used to write in any name or symbol. When writing in a name or symbol on the bottom part of the sheet, invert it with respect to the top part.
Appendix-22
Color balance adjustment Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments. (Refer to the Operation Guide for configuration details) More Magenta More Yellow
Less Black
More Cyan
Original
Less Cyan
More Black
Less Yellow Less Magenta
Appendix-23
Sharpness adjustment Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. (Refer to the Operation Guide for configuration details)
Less Sharp
Original
More Sharp
Color saturation adjustment The color saturation of the image can be adjusted. Color can be emphasized, or color can be made paler and closer to a monotone.
Original
Setting a high color saturation
Setting a low color saturation
Appendix-24
Specifications NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Common functions Description Item Without fax model
With fax model
Type
Desktop
Printing Method
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Image Write System
Semiconductor laser
Paper Weight
Cassette 1
60 to 163 g/m2 (Duplex: 60 to 163 g/m2)
Multi Purpose Tray
60 to 220 g/m2, 230 µm (Cardstock)
Paper Type
Cassette 1
Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Cassette 1
Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/Legal (Duplex: 8 1/2 × 14"/Legal) Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6 (Duplex: 7 1/4 × 10 1/2"/A5)
Multi Purpose Tray
Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/Legal Minimum: 3 5/8 × 6 1/2"/B6
Cassette 1
250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose Tray
50 sheets (80 g/m2, plain paper, A4/Letter or less)
Paper Size
Paper Capacity
Output Tray Capacity
150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Memory
Standard: 1GB
Interface
Operating Environment
Maximum: 2GB
Standard
USB Hi-Speed Interface: 1 Print, Scan (TWAIN/WIA) USB memory slot: 2 Print to USB, Scan to USB, Card Authentication kit Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX (TCP/IP, NetBEUI)) Print Scan (TWAIN/WIA), Scan to (SMB/FTP/Mail)
Option
eKUIO slot: 1
Temperature
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity
15 to 80 %
Altitude
8,200 feet/2,500 m or less
Brightness
1,500 lux or less
Appendix-25
Description Item Without fax model Warm-up Time (22°C/ 71.6°F,60%)
Power on
29 seconds or less
Low Power Mode
11 seconds or less
Sleep
17 seconds or less
With fax model
Dimension (W × D × H)
20 15/64 × 21 42/64 × 22 53/64" 514 × 550 × 580 mm
20 15/64 × 21 42/64 × 22 53/64" 514 × 550 × 580 mm
Weight (with toner container)
80.3 lb/36.5 kg
80.3 lb/36.5 kg
Space Required (W × D)
20 15/64 × 29 17/32" 514 × 750 mm (with Multi Purpose Tray expanded)
Power Requirement
120V Specification Model: 120V AC, 60Hz more than 8.9A 230V Specification Model: 220 - 240V AC, 50/60Hz more than 4.7A
Options
Paper feeder (up to 2 units), Expanded memory, Card Authentication Kit, SSD, Network Interface Kit, Wireless Network Interface Kit
Copy functions Item
Description
Copy Speed
Simplex
A4: 26 sheets/min Legal: 23 sheets/min Letter: 28 sheets/min
A5/B5/A6 (until 15th image): 28 sheets/min A5/B5/A6 (from 16th image): 14 sheets/min
First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette 1)
Black & White
When using the document processor: 11 seconds or less When the document processor is not used: 10 seconds or less
Color
When using the document processor: 13 seconds or less When the document processor is not used: 12 seconds or less
Zoom Level
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments Fixed magnifications: 400%, 200%, 141%, 129%, 115%, 90%, 86%, 78%, 70%, 64%, 50%, 25%
Continuous Copying
1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments)
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal)
Original Feed System
Fixed
Appendix-26
Printer functions Item Printing Speed (60 to 105 g/m2)
Description
Simplex
A4: 26 sheets/min Legal: 23 sheets/min Letter: 28 sheets/min
A5/B5/A6 (until 15th image): 28 sheets/min A5/B5/A6 (from 16th image): 14 sheets/min
Duplex
A4: 13 sheets/min Legal: 12 sheets/min
Letter: 13 sheets/min
First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette 1)
Black & White: 8.5 seconds or less Color: 9.0 seconds or less
Resolution
600 dpi
Operating System
Windows XP, Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Vista x86 Edition, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows 7 x86 Edition, Windows 7 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2012 x64 Edition, Windows 8 x86 Edition, Windows 8 x64 Edition, Apple Macintosh OS X (10.5 or later)
Page Description Language
PRESCRIBE
Emulations
PCL6 (PCL5e, PCL-XL), PCL6 (PCL5c, PCL-XL), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF Direct Print Ver.1.7, XPS
Scanner functions Item
Description
Resolution
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi
File Format
JPEG, TIFF, PDF, XPS, PDF/A, High Comp. PDF
Scanning Speed
1-sided: B/W 35 Images/min Color 25 Images/min 2-sided: B/W 21 Images/min Color 15 Images/min (A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Network Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission System
PC transmission
*1 *2
SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail TWAIN scan*1 WIA scan*2
Available Operating System : Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows 8 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows 8
Appendix-27
Document Processor Item
Description
Original Feed Method
Automatic feed
Supported Original Types
Sheet originals
Paper Size
Maximum: Legal/A4 Minimum: Statement/A5
Paper Weight
50 to 120 g/m2 (Duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2)
Loading Capacity
50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H)
19 19/64 × 21 × 4 3/32" 490 × 338 × 104 mm
Weight
3 kg or less
Environmental Specifications Description Item Without fax model Time to Low Power mode (default setting)
1 minute
Recovery time from Low Power mode
11 seconds or less
Time to Sleep mode (default setting)
15 minutes
Recovery time from Sleep mode
17 seconds or less
Duplexing
Standard
Paper supply capability
100% recycled paper may be used.
With fax model
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
EN ISO 7779 Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000 Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
Appendix-28
Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network. Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed. Auto-IP This is a protocol that automatically assigns IP addresses on a TCP/IP network. On a network without a DHCP server, this can assign IP addresses so that there is no duplication with other devices. IP addresses are assigned from the range 169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255, which is reserved for Auto-IP. Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep Mode A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum. Bonjour Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour. Default Gateway This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
Appendix-29
dpi (dots per inch) A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm). EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal. Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of PCL6 and KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible). FTP(File Transfer Protocol) A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet. Grayscale A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits. IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be between 0 and 255. IPP IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption. KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language) Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3. Multi Purpose (MP) Tray The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels. NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
Appendix-30
NetWare Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems. PDF/A This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently being prepared. POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet. PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highlyfunctional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies. PPM (prints per minute) This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute. Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine. RAM Disk Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time). Send as E-mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers. Status Page The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source settings.
Appendix-31
Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network. TCP/IP (IPv6) TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission. TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name) A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers. The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software. USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0 A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer. WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
Appendix-32
Index
Index Numerics 1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-8
A Adjusting Density 5-16 Adjustment/Maintenance 8-123 Backgrnd Density 8-125 Copy Density Adjustment 8-123 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-134 Send/Box Density 8-124, 8-126, 8-127 Auto Paper Selection Appendix-29 Auto Sleep 2-10, Appendix-29
B Bonjour Appendix-29 Bundled Items 2-2 Buzzer 8-6
C Card Authentication Kit Appendix-4 Cassette Loading Paper 2-48 Paper Size and Media Type 8-13 Changing Language 2-11, 8-3 Cleaning Separator 9-4, 9-6 Slit Glass 9-3 Color Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection 5-18 Color mode Color Selection (Copy) 8-38 Combine Mode 2-in-1 Mode 4-11 4-in-1 Mode 4-12 Page Boundary Lines 4-12
Connecting LAN Cable 2-5 Power Cable 2-11 USB Cable 2-11 Connection Method 2-3 Continuous Scan Copy 4-14 Send 5-19 Conventions in This Guide xxxiii Copy Adjusting Density 3-9 Collate Copying 3-19 Duplex Copying 3-15 Offset Copying 3-19 Originals 4-2 Selecting Image Quality 3-10 Setup 8-69 Zoom Copying 3-12 Copy Settings 8-69 Auto Paper Selection 8-70, 8-71 Paper Selection 8-69 Quick Setup Registration 8-73 Copying Functions 4-1 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11-29 Counting the Number of Pages Printed Each Job 11-30 Printing a Report 11-33 Total Job 11-29
D Date/Timer 8-141 Auto Panel Reset 8-146 Date Format 8-143 Date/Time 8-141 Low Power Timer 8-149 Time Zone 8-144 Default 8-30 Backgrnd(Copy) 8-31
Index-1
Index
Backgrnd(Send) 8-32 Collate/Offset 8-45 Color Selection (Copy) 8-38 Con.scan-ExptFAX 8-33 EcoPrint 8-46 E-mail Subject/Body 8-43 File Format 8-40 File Name 8-42 JPEG/TIFF Print 8-47 Original Image (Copy) 8-34 Original Image (Send) 8-36 Original Orientation 8-30 Scan Resolution 8-37 XPS FitTo Page 8-48, 8-49 Zoom 8-41 Default Gateway Appendix-29 Default Screen 8-5 Density Adjustment Copy 3-9 Send 5-16 Destination 8-158 Adding 8-158 Adding a Group 8-164 Choosing by One-Touch Key 3-43 Choosing from the Address Book 3-41 Editing 8-168 One-touch Key 8-170 Search 3-42 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) 344 Device 7-20 Checking Status 7-20 Configuring 7-21 DHCP Appendix-29 Document Box 6-1 Quick Setup Registration 8-83 Document Processor Appendix-28 How to Load Originals 2-67 Loading Originals 2-66 Not Supported Originals 2-66 Part Names 2-66 Supported Originals 2-66 dpi Appendix-30 Duplex 3-15, 8-104 DVD 2-2
E EcoPrint Mode Appendix-30 Copy 4-10 Print 8-102 E-mail Send as E-mail 3-25 Embedded Web Server RX 2-36 Emulation Appendix-30 Selection 8-99 Energy Star Program xxxi Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-21 Entry Body 5-21 File Name 4-17, 5-20 Subject 5-21 Environment xxi Error Handling 8-28 Error Messages 10-8 Expansion Memory Appendix-2
F File Format 5-12 File Name 4-17 FTP Appendix-30 FTP Encrypted TX 5-29, 5-30
G GPL xxviii Grayscale 5-18, Appendix-30
H High Comp.PDF 8-61
I Image Quality Copy 3-7 Send 5-15 Included Guides 2 Interface Block 8-209 IP Address Appendix-30
Index-2
Index
IPP Appendix-30
N
J
NetBEUI Appendix-30 NetWare 8-200 Setup 8-200 Network Setup 2-15 Network Cable 2-4 Connecting 2-5 Network Interface 2-4 Network Interface Kit Appendix-5 Network Security 8-185 Network Setup Bonjour Settings 8-177 FTP (Reception) 8-181 HTTP 8-181 HTTPS 8-182 IPP over SSL 8-181 LAN Interface 8-174 LDAP 8-182 LPD 8-181 NetBEUI 8-181 NetWare 8-200 POP3 (E-mail RX) 8-181 Raw Port 8-181 Restart Network 8-184 SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-181 SNMP 8-181 TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-175 TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-175, 8-178, 8-179 NW InterfaceSend 8-208
Job Available Status 7-2 Canceling 3-46, 7-19 Checking History 7-8 Checking Status 7-2 Pause and Resumption 7-19 Sending the Job Log History 7-13 Job Accounting 11-13 Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 1121 Restricting the Use of the Machine 1122 Job Finish Notice 5-27 Copy 4-15 Send 5-27
K KPDL Appendix-30
L Label Appendix-20 LAN Cable Connecting 2-5 Legal Information xxvi Login 3-2, 11-5 Logout 3-2, 11-5 Low Power Mode 2-10
O
M Management 11-1 Job Accounting 11-13 User Login Administration 11-2 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxx Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-30 Paper Size and Media 2-62, 8-16 Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types of Destinations ) 3-44
Open SSLeay xxviii Operation Panel 1-2 Option Card Authentication Kit Appendix-4 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 Network Interface Kit Appendix-5 Overview Appendix-2 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 SSD Appendix-4 ThinPrint Option Appendix-5 USB Keyboard Appendix-5 Wireless Network Interface Kit
Index-3
Index
Appendix-5 Optional Functions 8-215 Optional Network 8-196 AppleTalk 8-202 Bonjour Settings 8-198 IPSec 8-199 LAN Interface 8-203 MAC Address Filter 8-204 NetWare 8-200 Restart Network 8-206 TCP/IP Settings 8-196 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2-66 Placing on the Platen 2-65 Original Orientation Copy 4-8 Document Processor 4-8 Send 5-10 Original Size Indicator Plates 2-65 Original Size Selection Send 5-2 Original SSLeay License xxix Originals Copy 4-2 Custom 8-8 Setup 8-8 Size Selection 4-2, 5-2
P Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix-16 Auto Selection 8-23 Before Loading 2-47 Cassette 8-13 Custom 8-11 Default Paper Source 8-22 Loading Envelopes 2-53 Loading in the Cassettes 2-48 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-51 Multi Purpose Tray 8-16 Setup 8-8 Size and Media 2-57, Appendix-13 Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-18 Specifications Appendix-15
Weight 8-18 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 Paper Jam 10-16 Document Processor 10-20 Paper Selection 4-4 Cassette 4-4 Multi Purpose Tray 4-5 Part Names 1-1 Platen Placing Originals 2-65 POP3 Appendix-31 PostScript Appendix-31 Power Cable Connecting 2-11 Power Off 2-7 Power On 2-7 PPM Appendix-31 Preparation 2-1 Preparing Cables 2-4 Printer Setup 8-99 Printer Driver Appendix-31 Printer Settings 8-99 Auto Cass.Change 8-115 Copies 8-105 CR Action 8-111 Duplex 8-104 EcoPrint 8-102 Emulation 8-99 Form Feed Timeout 8-109 Job Name 8-112 LF Action 8-110 Orientation 8-107 Override A4/Letter 8-103 User Name 8-113 Printing 3-21 Printing from Applications 3-21 Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-117 Font List 8-118 Network Status Page 8-119 Optional Network Status 8-118 Service Status Page 8-119 Status Page 8-117 Transmission Result Reports 8-121 Product Library 2-2
Index-4
Index
Q Quick Setup Screen Changing Registration 8-73, 8-75, 8-83
R Resolution Appendix-26, Appendix-27 Restarting the System 8-173
S Safety Conventions i Scan Resolution 5-17 Default settings 8-37 SD Card Format 8-65 Send File Format 5-12 Image Quality 5-15 Original Size Selection 5-2 Sending Size Selection 5-4 Setup 8-75 Sending Send as E-mail 3-25 Send to Folder (FTP) 3-29 Send to Folder (SMB) 3-29 Sending Functions 5-1 Sending Settings 8-75 Default Screen 8-78 Quick Setup Registration 8-75 Send and Forward 8-79 Sending Size Selection 5-4 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-44 Separator Cleaning 9-4, 9-6 Setting Date and Time 2-12 Setup Copy 8-69 Date/Timer 8-141 NetWare 8-200 Network 8-174 Printer 8-99 Send 8-75 Sharpness adjustment Appendix-24
Sleep 2-9 Slit Glass Cleaning 9-3 SMTP Appendix-31 Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Specifications Common functions Appendix-25 Copy functions Appendix-26 Document Processor Appendix-28 Environmental Specifications Appendix-28 Printer functions Appendix-27 Scanner functions Appendix-27 Specifying Destination 3-41 SSD Appendix-4 Format 8-64 Status / Job Cancel 7-1 Status Page 8-117, Appendix-31 Subnet Mask Appendix-32 Switching the Language 2-11, 8-3 Switching Unit of Measurement 8-27 Symbols i System Menu 8-1
T TCP/IP Appendix-32 ThinPrint Option Appendix-5 TonerAlert Level 8-68 Trade Names xxvii TWAIN Appendix-32
U Unusable Time 8-156 USB Appendix-32 USB Cable Connecting 2-11 USB Interface 2-4 USB Keyboard Appendix-5 USB Memory Printing Documents 6-2 Removing 6-7, 6-16 Saving Documents 6-5 TIFF Print 6-3 XPS FitTo Page 6-4
Index-5
Index
User Login Administration 11-2 Adding 11-6 Changing Properties 11-8 Displaying Network User Property 11-11 Enabling/Disabling 11-3 Enabling/Disabling Group Authentication 11-10 Login 11-5 Logout 11-5 Unknown login user name Job 11-12
W WIA Appendix-32 Wireless Network Interface Kit Appendix-5 WSD Scan 5-25
X XPS File formats 5-12, 8-40 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6-5
Z Zoom Copying Auto Zoom 3-12 Manual Zoom 3-12 Preset Zoom 3-12 Zoom Mode Copy 3-12, 5-6 Send 5-6
Index-6
TA Triumph-Adler GmbH Betriebsstätte Norderstedt Ohechaussee 235 22848 Norderstedt Germany
First edition 2013.11 2PWGEEN000
